Mercedes - SLC Roadster - Owners Manual - 2008 - 2008

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read the Owner's Manual. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid endangering yourself and others. Items of optional equipment are marked with an asterisk *. The equipment in your vehicle may vary, depending on the model, the ordered items, the country specifications and availability. The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of the switches, levers, stowage compartments, etc. will differ accordingly in a right-handdrive vehicle. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art and therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time. You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's Manual. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you have any questions. The Owner’s Manual, Brief Instructions, service booklet and supplements related to vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle. You should always keep them in the vehicle preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 1 Version: 2.10.6 and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in German and in English in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, Contents Index........................................................ 3 Introduction.......................................... 15 At a glance............................................ 19 Safety.................................................... 35 Controls................................................ 59 Operation............................................ 167 Practical advice................................. 199 Technical data.................................... 273 2 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 2 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 3 Version: 2.10.6 Index A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).......... 55 Display message............ 204, 205, 206 Warning lamp.................................. 224 Acceleration Technical data................................ 281 Accident Notes.............................................. 231 Active head restraint........................... 42 Active Park Assist Display messages........................... 210 Active parking assist......................... 123 Trailer towing.................................. 127 Active Service System PLUS see Service indicator Adaptive brake lamps.......................... 56 Airbag Activation.......................................... 37 Control unit....................................... 37 Driver's............................................. 40 Front................................................. 40 Front passenger................................ 40 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp .............................................. 223 Sidebags........................................... 41 System.............................................. 39 Windowbags..................................... 42 Airbags Head/thorax airbags........................ 41 Air conditioning Activating/deactivating.................. 135 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode................................. 141 Air-conditioning system.................. 132 Controlling automatically................ 136 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode).................. 141 Cooling with air dehumidification. . . 136 Demisting the windscreen.............. 139 Heatmatic....................................... 131 Malfunction indicator lamp............. 222 Misted-up windows......................... 140 Rear window heating...................... 140 Setting the air distribution.............. 138 Setting the airflow.......................... 139 Setting the air vents....................... 137 Setting the temperature................. 136 Switching the residual heat function on/off...................................... 142 Thermotronic.................................. 134 Air-conditioning system see Air conditioning Antifreeze concentration................... 299 Anti-lock braking system see ABS Anti-theft alarm system see ATA Anti-theft systems................................ 57 Armrest Front seat (adjusting)........................ 67 Rear seat (adjusting)......................... 68 Removing/fitting............................ 148 Ashtray................................................ 162 ASSYST PLUS see Service interval display ASSYST PLUS service indicator........ 191 ATA (anti-theft alarm system)............. 57 Switching off the alarm..................... 57 Audible warning signal...................... 230 AUTO lights Display message............................. 216 Automatic car wash........................... 193 Automatic engine start Using the ECO Start-Stop function. . . 91 With ECO start/stop function........... 89 Automatic transmission Changing gear yourself..................... 95 Display message............................. 209 Driving tips....................................... 96 Emergency running mode............... 235 Malfunction..................................... 235 One-touch gearshifting..................... 95 Program selector button................... 96 Trailer towing.................................... 96 Working on the vehicle..................... 96 AUTOTRONIC Releasing the parking lock manually................................................ 243 3 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 4 Version: 2.10.6 Index Axle load, maximum permissible ..................................................... 287, 289 B Backrest Removing/fitting............................ 152 Bag hook............................................. 158 Ball coupling Fitting............................................. 186 Removing........................................ 190 BAS (Brake Assist)............................... 55 Battery Changing (key)................................ 244 Charging......................................... 265 Checking (key)................................ 244 Check lamp (key)............................ 244 Disconnecting................................. 265 Display message............................. 213 Jump starting.................................. 266 Maintenance (vehicle)..................... 263 Reconnecting.................................. 266 Removing/fitting............................ 265 Vehicle battery............................... 263 Belt force limiters Activation.......................................... 37 Belt height adjustment........................ 75 Belt tensioners Activation.......................................... 37 Belt warning.......................................... 75 4 Bonnet Bonnet catch.................................. 172 Opening/closing ............................ 171 Bonnet release lever Release lever.................................. 171 Brake Assist see BAS Brake fluid.......................................... 300 Display message............................. 214 Brake lamps Adaptive............................................ 56 Display message............................. 217 Brakes Parking brake.................................... 90 Warning lamp.................................. 226 Brake system Display message............................. 213 Bulbs Brake lamp..................................... 250 Cornering light................................ 248 Dipped-beam headlamps................ 247 Display messages........................... 216 Licence plate lamp.......................... 250 Main-beam headlamps................... 248 Overview......................................... 245 Parking lamp................................... 248 Rear foglamp.................................. 250 Replacing................................ 247, 249 Reversing lamp............................... 250 Side lamp........................................ 248 Tail lamp......................................... 250 Turn signal lamp..................... 249, 250 C Calling up a malfunction see Message memory menu Care..................................................... 192 Automatic car wash........................ 193 Exhaust tail pipes............................ 196 Headlamps..................................... 194 High-pressure cleaners................... 193 Parktronic....................................... 196 Plastic trim..................................... 195 Rear window................................... 194 Side windows.................................. 194 Trailer tow hitch.............................. 196 CD player/CD changer Operating (on-board computer) ....................................................... 104 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer).............................................. 111 Key................................................... 60 Central locking/unlocking button...... 61 Central unlocking Key................................................... 60 Centre console Lower section................................... 32 Upper section................................... 31 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 5 Version: 2.10.6 Index Changing a wheel see Flat tyre Child-proof locks Rear doors........................................ 54 Children Fastening seat belts.......................... 51 In the vehicle.................................... 42 Restraint systems............................. 43 Child seat Automatic recognition...................... 45 Automatic recognition (malfunction)................................................ 223 Integrated......................................... 50 ISOFIX............................................... 48 Recommendations............................ 47 Suitable positions............................. 46 Cigarette lighter................................. 163 Cockpit Overview........................................... 22 COMAND............................................. 101 On-board computer........................ 101 see separate operating instructions Constant headlamp mode Setting (on-board computer)........... 109 Consumption statistics (on-board computer)........................................... 112 Convenience closing............................ 86 Convenience opening........................... 86 Coolant................................................ 175 Checking the level.......................... 175 Display message............ 213, 214, 215 Mixture ratio................................... 297 Temperature gauge........................... 97 Cornering light Display message............................. 216 Cruise control..................................... 115 Cup holder.......................................... 144 D Dashboard see Instrument cluster Date Setting (on-board computer)........... Daytime driving lights see Constant headlamp mode Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer).............................................. Interior lighting (on-board computer).............................................. Diesel Low outside temperatures.............. Diesel engine Winter driving................................. Digital speedometer.......................... Dipped-beam headlamps Display message............................. Symmetrical................................... 109 110 110 170 170 103 216 185 Display message................................ 202 Service interval display................... 191 Display messages Symbol messages........................... 212 Text messages................................ 203 Distance recorder see Total distance recorder see Trip meter Distance Recorder see Trip meter Door Automatic locking............................. 61 Display message............................. 212 Emergency locking......................... 242 Emergency unlocking...................... 241 Opening (from the inside)................. 61 Door control panel Overview........................................... 34 Drinks holder see Cup holder Driver's airbag...................................... 40 Driver's seat position........................... 76 Driving abroad.................................... 185 Driving safety system.......................... 55 ABS................................................... 55 Adaptive brake lamps....................... 56 BAS................................................... 55 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL................................................. 56 5 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 6 Version: 2.10.6 Index Driving safety systems ESP® ................................................ 56 Driving system................................... 115 Active parking assist....................... 123 Cruise control................................. 115 ECO start/stop function................. 127 Parktronic....................................... 120 Speedtronic.................................... 117 Driving tip Braking........................................... 183 Trailer towing.................................. 188 Winter............................................. 182 Driving tips Driving abroad ............................... 185 Driving on wet roads ...................... 185 Fording .......................................... 185 DVD audio Operating (on-board computer)...... 104 DVD video Operating (on-board computer)...... 105 E Easy-entry feature................................ 67 EASY-VARIO-PLUS system................. 149 EASY-VARIO system........................... 149 ECO start/stop function.................... 127 Electrical/electronic equipment Retrofitting..................................... 275 6 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® e mark................................................. 275 Emergency key element Lost................................................ 239 Emergency locking Vehicle............................................ 242 Emergency release Fuel filler flap.................................. 242 Emergency running mode Automatic transmission.................. 235 Emergency starting............................ 270 Emergency unlocking Vehicle............................................ 241 Engine Display message............................. 212 Running irregularly.......................... 234 Starting problems........................... 233 Starting with ECO start/stop function............................................ 89 Starting with the key......................... 87 Switching off..................................... 91 Switching off using the ECO StartStop function.................................... 91 Technical data................................ 278 Engine diagnostics warning lamp ............................................................. 227 Engine electronics.............................. 275 Malfunction..................................... 233 Engine number................................... 277 Engine oil ........................................... 296 Capacities....................................... 174 Checking the oil level (dipstick)...... 174 Checking the oil level (on-board computer)....................................... 173 Consumption ................................. 172 Display message ....................................... 173, 219, 220 Filler neck....................................... 174 Topping up...................................... 174 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)... 56 Display messages........... 207, 208, 209 Warning lamp........................... 56, 226 Exterior lighting Delayed switch-off (on-board computer)....................................... 110 Exterior mirrors Adjusting.......................................... 71 Folding in/out (automatically).......... 72 Folding in/out (electrically).............. 72 Folding in when locking (on-board computer)....................................... 111 Malfunction..................................... 238 Resetting.......................................... 72 Exterior view Overview........................................... 20 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 7 Version: 2.10.6 Index F Fastening seat belts Children............................................ 51 Fire extinguisher................................ 201 First-aid kit......................................... 200 Flat tyre Equipment...................................... 253 MOExtended run-flat system.......... 262 Preparing the vehicle...................... 253 TIREFIT kit....................................... 253 Floormat.............................................. 165 Foglamps Display message............................. 218 Fording................................................ 185 Frequencies Telephone....................................... 276 Front airbag.......................................... 40 Front-passenger airbag........................ 40 Front-passenger seat Folding the backrest forward/ back................................................ 158 Removing/fitting............................ 156 Fuel...................................................... 292 Diesel............................................. 170 Gauge............................................... 26 Loss................................................ 232 Petrol.............................................. 169 Fuel consumption...................... 293, 294 Fuel filler flap Emergency release......................... Opening/closing ............................ Fuel filter Display message............................. Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer)....................................... Fuel line Malfunction..................................... Fuel tank Defect............................................. Fuse allocation chart......................... Fuse box.............................................. Fuses................................................... 242 168 214 113 232 232 271 271 271 G Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.......... 274 Glove compartment........................... 160 Gross vehicle weight, maximum permissible................................. 287, 288 H Handbrake Display message............................. 214 Head/thorax airbags........................... 41 Headlamps Cleaning......................................... 194 Cleaning system............................... 81 Misting up....................................... 237 Headlamps delayed switch-off see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off Head restraint Active head restraint......................... 42 Adjusting (front).......................... 64, 65 Adjusting (rear)................................. 66 Removing (rear)................................ 66 Heating see Air conditioning High-pressure cleaners..................... 193 Hill start assist..................................... 90 I Immobiliser........................................... 57 Indicator and warning lamp Air conditioning (malfunction)......... 222 Automatic child seat recognition (malfunction).................................. 223 Brakes (red).................................... 226 Engine diagnostics.......................... 227 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF......... 45, 223 Reserve fuel.................................... 229 Seat belt......................................... 228 SRS........................................... 37, 226 Thermotronic (malfunction)............ 222 Indicator and warning lamps............ 224 7 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 8 Version: 2.10.6 Index Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster............................... 97 Overview........................................... 26 Selecting the language (on-board computer)....................................... 108 Instrument lighting.............................. 97 Integrated child seat............................ 50 Interior lighting Automatic control system................. 82 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer)....................................... 110 Emergency lighting........................... 83 Manual control.................................. 82 Reading lamp.................................... 82 Interior motion sensor......................... 58 ISOFIX child seat securing system..... 48 J Jack...................................................... Operation........................................ Jump-starting...................................... Jump leads...................................... 200 259 266 266 K Key......................................................... 60 Changing the battery...................... 244 Checking the battery...................... 244 Display message............................. 220 8 Loss................................................ 239 Malfunction..................................... 239 Modifying the programming.............. 60 Key positions Key................................................... 62 Kickdown.............................................. 96 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lashing eyelets.................................. 146 Licence plate lighting Display message............................. 218 Light bulbs see Bulbs Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode............... 78 Constant headlamp mode................. 78 Cornering light function.................... 81 Dipped-beam headlamps.................. 78 Display messages........................... 216 Foglamps.......................................... 79 Hazard warning lamps...................... 80 Headlamp flasher.............................. 80 Headlamp range............................... 80 Light switch...................................... 77 Main-beam headlamps...................... 80 Rear fog lamp................................... 79 Switching off (display message)...... 218 Turn signals...................................... 79 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control................................. 116 Variable Speedtronic...................... 118 Load compartment load, maximum ..................................................... 288, 289 Loading guidelines............................. 145 Locking Automatic......................................... 61 Emergency locking......................... 242 From the inside (central locking button).............................................. 61 Luggage compartment enlargement.................................................... 150 Luggage compartment floor Adjusting the height....................... 155 stowage well, under........................ 154 Luggage cover.................................... 159 Luggage net........................................ 145 Lumbar support.................................... 68 M Main-beam headlamps Display message............................. 218 Main fuse box..................................... 271 Maintenance Battery............................................ 263 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 9 Version: 2.10.6 Index Malfunction memory see Message memory menu Manual transmission........................... 92 Maximum speed Technical data................................ 280 Memory card...................................... 104 Operating (on-board computer)...... 104 see separate operating instructions Menu (on-board computer)................ 101 Audio.............................................. 103 DVD................................................ 105 Message memory........................... 106 Navigation...................................... 105 Operating........................................ 102 Resetting to factory settings........... 106 Settings.......................................... 106 Submenu overview......................... 107 Telephone....................................... 113 Trip computer................................. 112 Messages see Display messages see Message memory menu see Warning and indicator lamps Minispare emergency spare wheel Technical data................................ 285 Mirrors Sun visor......................................... 162 Mobile phone...................................... 164 Display message..................... 210, 220 Installation...................................... 275 Telephone menu (on-board computer).............................................. 113 Modifying the programming Key................................................... 60 MOExtended run-flat system*. . 178, 262 MP3..................................................... 104 Operating (on-board computer) ....................................................... 104 see separate operating instructions Multi-contour backrest........................ 69 Multi-function display.................. 97, 100 Multi-function steering wheel............. 98 Overview........................................... 30 N Navigation........................................... 105 Navigation menu (on-board computer).............................................. 105 see separate operating instructions O Odometer Total distance recorder..................... 26 Trip meter......................................... 26 Oil Consumption.................................. 172 Topping up...................................... 174 Oil level Checking (dipstick)......................... 174 Checking (on-board computer)....... 173 On-board computer.............................. 98 Audio menu.................................... 103 Convenience submenu................... 108 Display messages........................... 202 DVD menu...................................... 105 Factory settings.............................. 106 Instrument cluster submenu........... 107 Lighting submenu........................... 108 Message memory menu.................. 106 Navigation menu............................. 105 Operation menu.............................. 102 Settings menu................................ 106 Standard display menu................... 103 Telephone menu............................. 113 Time/date submenu....................... 107 Trip computer menu....................... 112 Vehicle submenu............................ 108 On-board computer language........... 108 One-touch gearshifting........................ 95 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display ............. 98 On-board computer........................ 103 Override feature Rear side windows............................ 54 9 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 10 Version: 2.10.6 Index P Padded table Integrated child seat......................... 51 Paint code number............................. 276 Park Assist Display messages........................... 210 Parking.................................................. 90 Parking aid Active parking assist....................... 123 Display message............................. 210 Parktronic....................................... 120 Parking brake....................................... 90 Display message............................. 214 Parking lamps Display message............................. 218 Parking lock Releasing manually (AUTOTRONIC).......................................... 243 Parktronic........................................... 120 Activating/deactivating.................. 122 Malfunction..................................... 236 Range of the sensors...................... 121 Trailer towing.................................. 123 Warning display.............................. 121 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp.............................................. 45, 223 Performance....................................... 280 Permanent Speedtronic..................... 120 10 Petrol Minimum grade............................... 169 Plastic trim Cleaning......................................... 195 Power supply (trailer)........................ 190 Power window switch see Side windows Program selector button Automatic transmission.................... 96 Pulling away.......................................... 89 R Radio Changing a station (on-board computer)....................................... 103 Setting for station selection (onboard computer)............................. 111 see separate operating instructions Range (on-board computer).............. 113 Rear bench seat Folding forward............................... 150 Rear-compartment seat belt status indicator......................................... 76 Rear foglamp Display message............................. 218 Rear-view mirror Adjusting.......................................... 70 Anti-dazzle (manual)......................... 70 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic)........... 70 Rear window Cleaning......................................... 194 Rear window heating......................... 140 Malfunction indicator lamp............. 223 Rear window wiper.............................. 83 Replacing the wiper blade............... 251 Refuelling............................................ 168 Replacing the wiper blades............... 251 Reserve Warning lamp.................................. 229 Reserve fuel........................................ 292 Display message............................. 220 Fuel tank......................................... 292 Warning lamp........................... 26, 229 Reset button......................................... 97 Restraint system see SRS see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Restraint systems For children...................................... 43 Rev counter........................................... 98 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission)... 94 Engaging (manual transmission) ................................................... 92, 93 Reversing lamp Display message............................. 219 Roof load, maximum.................. 288, 289 Roof rack............................................. 144 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 11 Version: 2.10.6 Index S Seat Adjusting.................................... 63, 65 Correct driver's seat position........... 76 Folding the rear bench seat forward........................................... 150 Removing/fitting the frontpassenger seat............................... 156 Removing/fitting the rear seat backrest......................................... 152 Removing/fitting the rear seat cushion........................................... 151 Seat belt Adjusting the height.......................... 75 Display message....................... 76, 212 Fastening.......................................... 73 Warning lamp........................... 75, 228 Seat cushion Removing (rear bench seat)............ 151 Seat heating.......................................... 69 Seat ventilation Malfunction indicator lamp............. 222 Securing a load................................... 146 Selector lever Positions........................................... 94 Service indicator................................ 191 Service products................................ 292 Brake fluid...................................... 300 Coolant........................................... 297 Windscreen washer fluid................. 300 Settings Factory (on-board computer).......... 106 Setting the unit (on-board computer) Speedometer.................................. 108 Sidebags................................................ 41 Side window Fault............................................... 238 Side windows Cleaning......................................... 194 Opening/closing............................... 84 resetting........................................... 85 Ski rack............................................... 144 Snow chains....................................... 182 Socket Cockpit........................................... 163 Luggage compartment.................... 164 Spare wheel Fitting............................................. 259 Storage location............................. 200 Technical data................................ 285 Speed Technical data................................ 280 Speed limiter Speedtronic.................................... 117 Speedometer Digital speedometer (on-board computer)....................................... 103 Setting the unit (on-board computer).............................................. 108 Speedtronic........................................ 117 Display message............................. 220 Permanent...................................... 120 Variable.......................................... 118 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)....................................................... 37 Display message............................. 211 Warning lamp........................... 37, 226 Standard display (on-board computer)................................................... 103 Station see Radio Status line (on-board computer)....... 100 Selecting the display....................... 108 Steering Display message............................. 215 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL... 56 Steering wheel Adjusting.......................................... 70 Buttons (on-board computer)............ 98 Stowage compartment...................... 159 Armrest (front)................................ 160 Armrest (under).............................. 161 Boxes under the driver's seat/ front-passenger seat....................... 161 11 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 12 Version: 2.10.6 Index Centre console............................... 160 Glove compartment........................ 160 Luggage compartment.................... 161 Stowage space Cup holder...................................... 144 Submenu (on-board computer)......... 107 Convenience................................... 108 Instrument cluster.......................... 107 Lighting........................................... 108 Time/date...................................... 107 Vehicle............................................ 108 Summer opening see Convenience opening Sun visor............................................. 162 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Surround lighting Switching on/off (on-board computer).............................................. 110 Switching off the alarm ATA................................................... 57 T Tailgate Display message............................. 212 Opening/closing............................... 62 Tail lamps changing......................................... 250 12 Tank see Fuel tank Tank capacity..................................... 292 Technical data Acceleration................................... 281 Engine............................................. 278 Speed............................................. 280 Trailer loads.................................... 291 Tyres............................................... 283 Vehicle dimensions......................... 286 Vehicle weights............................... 286 Wheels............................................ 283 Telephone see Mobile phone Telephone compartment................... 160 Temperature Coolant............................................. 97 Outside temperature......................... 98 Thermotronic Malfunction indicator lamp............. 222 Third brake lamp Display message............................. 217 Through-loading................................. 147 Tightening torque............................... 262 Time Setting (on-board computer)........... 109 Setting the time (on-board computer).............................................. 109 TIREFIT kit Using.............................................. 253 TopTether.............................................. 49 Total distance recorder............... 26, 100 Tow-away protection........................... 58 Towing................................................. 269 Towing eye Fitting............................................. 269 Removing........................................ 270 Tow-starting........................................ 270 Trailer 7-pin connector.............................. 191 Display message............................. 216 Power supply.................................. 190 Trailer loads Technical data................................ 291 Trailer tow hitch Notes on care................................. 196 Trailer towing Active parking assist....................... 127 Driving tips..................................... 188 Malfunction..................................... 240 Mounting dimensions..................... 290 Parktronic....................................... 123 Transmission Display message............................. 209 Transmission output (maximum) Telephone/two-way radio............... 275 Transport (vehicle)............................. 270 Trip computer Menu (on-board computer)............. 112 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 13 Version: 2.10.6 Index Trip meter............................. 26, 100, 102 Resetting.......................................... 98 Turn signal lamps Display message............................. 217 Two-way radio Installation...................................... 275 Tyre grip.............................................. 184 Tyre pressure ..................................... 178 Display message............................. 211 see Tyre pressure Tyre pressure loss warning system. 179 Tyres Direction of rotation....................... 177 General notes................................. 176 Technical data................................ 283 Tyre tread............................................ 178 U Unladen weight.......................... 287, 288 Unlocking Emergency unlocking...................... 241 From the inside (central unlocking button).............................................. 61 V Variable Speedtronic......................... 118 Vehicle Emergency unlocking............. 241, 242 Individual settings (on-board computer).............................................. 106 Leaving parked up.......................... 240 Towing............................................ 269 Tow-starting.................................... 270 Transporting................................... 270 Vehicle battery................................... 263 Vehicle dimensions............................ 286 Vehicle electronics............................ 275 Vehicle identification number (VIN). 277 Vehicle identification plates............. 276 Vehicle tool kit................................... 200 Vehicle weights.................................. 286 W Warning and indicator lamp ABS (yellow).................................... 224 LIM (cruise control)......................... 116 LIM (variable Speedtronic).............. 118 Warning and indicator lamps ESP®......................................... 56, 226 Warning signal Audible........................................... 230 Warning triangle................................. 200 Washer fluid Display message............................. 221 Washer fluid reservoir....................... 300 Filling capacity................................ 300 Wearing seat belts............................... 73 Wheel bolts Tightening torque............................ 262 Wheel chock Use................................................. 201 Wheels General notes................................. 176 Interchanging.................................. 181 Technical data................................ 283 Windowbags......................................... 42 Windows Cleaning......................................... 194 Cleaning the windscreen ............... 194 see Side windows Windscreen Cleaning ......................................... 194 Windscreen washer fluid................... 300 Topping up...................................... 175 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir. . 175 Windscreen washer system.............. 300 Windscreen wipers.............................. 83 Cleaning......................................... 194 Malfunction..................................... 237 Replacing the wiper blades............. 251 Winter diesel...................................... 170 Winter driving............................. 181, 182 13 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, Index Winter tyres........................................ 181 Limiting the speed (on-board computer).............................................. 120 14 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 14 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 15 Version: 2.10.6 Introduction Protection of the environment Protection of the environment H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: ROperating conditions of your vehicle RYour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions RAvoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. RMake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. RDo not carry any unnecessary weight. RKeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. RRemove roof racks once you no longer need them. RA regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. RAlways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style RDo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. RDo not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. RDrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. RAvoid frequent, sudden acceleration. RChange gear in good time and use each gear only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed. Returning used vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and re-use. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Z 15 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 16 Version: 2.10.6 Introduction Operating safety Operating safety G Risk of accident and injury Safety notes Work carried out incorrectly or impermissible modifications to the vehicle, for example cables laid under trim, can impair the function of the safety systems. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. There is also a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Have all work on and modifications to the vehicle, such as installations or conversions, carried out at a qualified workshop. G Risk of accident and injury Always have work on the vehicle carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems as well as maintenance work must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident and injury Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch the engine off when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems in your vehicle may no longer function correctly and thereby not provide you or others with the intended degree of protection. There is also a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. G Risk of accident A heavy impact to the underbody, tyres or wheels, for example when bottoming out on rough terrain or driving over an obstacle at high speed, could damage your vehicle. As a result, you could cause an accident. This also applies to vehicles which are equipped with underbody protection. For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles, avoid bottoming out the vehicle in rough terrain and, if necessary, have your vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, the 16 equipment could stop functioning. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Such malfunctions can seriously compromise the vehicle’s operating safety and your own safety as well. Have all work on and modifications to electronic components carried out at a qualified workshop. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 17 Version: 2.10.6 Introduction Operating safety Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: RThe safety notes in this manual RThe "Technical data" section in this manual RNational road traffic regulations RNational road traffic licensing regulations G Risk of injury Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. Z 17 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 18 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 18 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 19 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Exterior view ....................................... Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multi-function steering wheel ............ Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. 20 22 26 30 31 33 34 19 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, At a glance Exterior view Exterior view 20 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 20 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 21 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Exterior view Function 1 2 3 4 Page 7 Luggage compartment Spare wheel 201 Vehicle tool kit 200 Rear window heating 140 Opening and closing the tailgate 61 Fuel filler flap 168 Fuel requirements 168 5 Opening and closing the doors 60 6 Exterior mirrors 71 * optional Function 8 9 Page Demisting the windscreen 139 Cleaning the windows Function a Page Opening the bonnet 171 194 Engine oil 172 Panorama roof* 142 Coolant 175 Panorama louvred sliding sunroof* b Front lights 245 142 c Fitting the front towing eye 268 Windscreen wiper operation 83 d Tyres and wheels 176 Cleaning the wiper blades 194 Checking the tyre pressure 178 Replacing the wiper blades 251 Flat tyre, fitting the spare wheel 253 e Fitting the rear towing eye 268 f Rear lights 245 21 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles 22 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 22 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 23 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Cockpit Function Page 1 Opens the bonnet 2 Combination switch: 79 • main-beam headlamps 80 • turn signals 79 • windscreen wipers 83 • rear window wiper 83 3 171 Cruise control lever*: • Cruise control* 115 • Speedtronic* 117 * optional Function Page 4 Multi-function steering wheel 98 5 Instrument cluster 26 6 Horn 7 Parktronic* warning display 121 8 Overhead control panel 33 Function Page 9 Opens the glove compartment a Centre console 31 b Ignition lock 62 c Adjusts the steering wheel 70 d Adjusts the headlamp range 80 e Light switch 77 f Door control panel 34 160 23 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, At a glance Cockpit Right-hand-drive vehicles 24 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 24 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 25 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Cockpit Function Page Function Page 1 Overhead control panel 33 5 2 Parktronic* warning display Multi-function steering wheel 98 121 6 Instrument cluster 26 3 Combination switch: 79 7 Horn • main-beam headlamps 80 8 Opens the bonnet • turn signals 79 9 • windscreen wipers 83 a • rear window wiper 83 4 Function Page b Adjusts the headlamp range 80 c Ignition lock 62 d Adjusts the steering wheel 70 171 e Centre console 31 Door control panel 34 f Light switch 77 Opens the glove compartment 160 Cruise control lever*: • Cruise control* 115 • Speedtronic* 117 * optional 25 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Instrument cluster, kilometres 26 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 26 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 27 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 1 Page Function Page 1 LIM indicator lamp* 115 d 2 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) warning lamp Engine diagnostics warning lamp 227 226 e Reserve fuel warning lamp 229 3 Speedometer f 4 Turn signal indicator lamp Fuel filler cap location: the fuel filter cap is to the rear on the right 5 Multi-function display, upper section 79 100 6 Trip distance 98 7 Total distance 103 8 Turn signal indicator lamp 79 9 ABS (anti-lock braking system) warning lamp 224 a Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 88 b Rev counter 98 c SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) warning lamp m Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: Page 108 • Outside temperature1 • Digital speedometer g Fuel gauge h Main-beam indicator lamp 80 j Dipped-beam indicator lamp 78 k Seat belt warning lamp 228 l Clock Speedtronic*: stored limit speed Function 98 117 n Rear window wiper switched on o Multi-function display, lower section p AUTOTRONIC*: drive program display 94 q AUTOTRONIC*: selector lever position display 94 r Brake system warning lamp s Reset button 97 t Coolant temperature gauge 97 83 100 226 226 Vehicles for United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 27 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster, miles 28 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 28 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 29 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 2 Page 1 LIM indicator lamp* 115 2 ESP® warning lamp 226 3 Speedometer 4 Turn signal indicator lamp 5 Multi-function display, upper section 79 Function Page d Engine diagnostics warning lamp 227 e Reserve fuel warning lamp 229 f Fuel filler cap location: the fuel filter cap is to the rear on the right 100 g Fuel gauge Trip distance 98 h Main-beam indicator lamp 80 7 Total distance 103 j Dipped-beam indicator lamp 78 k Seat belt warning lamp 228 l Clock Turn signal indicator lamp 9 ABS warning lamp a Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 88 b Rev counter 98 c SRS warning lamp 79 224 Speedtronic*: stored limit speed m Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: Page 108 • Outside temperature2 • Digital speedometer 6 8 Function 98 117 226 n Rear window wiper switched on o Multi-function display, lower section p AUTOTRONIC*: drive program display 94 q AUTOTRONIC*: selector lever position display 94 r Brake system warning lamp s Reset button 97 t Coolant temperature gauge 97 83 100 226 Vehicles for United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 29 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 30 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Multi-function steering wheel Multi-function steering wheel Function 1 Multi-function display 2 æ• selects submenus in the Settings menu • changes values • adjusts the volume 3 4 s t Accepts or rejects/or ends a call* Page Function 100 113 j k Press briefly: scrolls back and forth in a menu 101 Audio 5*: in the Audio* menu, selects an audio track or, depending on the setting, a stored station or the next/previous station 103 5 30 Page Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*: in the Audio*/DVD* menu, selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. 103 In the Telephone* menu, switches to the phone book and selects a name or phone number 114 j k Press and hold (Audio 20* only), Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*): In the Audio*/DVD* menu, selects the next/previous station, selects an audio track using rapid scrolling 103 In the Telephone* menu, starts rapid scrolling through the telephone book 114 è ÿ Selects menus: scrolls back and forth 101 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 31 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Centre console Centre console Upper section Function 1 Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off 80 2 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp* 45 3 Controls COMAND APS* and the audio system* – see the respective operating instructions 4 Controls Heatmatic, the airconditioning system* or Thermotronic* 129 Switches the rear window heating on/off 140 Activates/deactivates the seat heating* for the righthand seat 69 6 Activates/deactivates the ECO start/stop function* 127 7 Primes/deactivates the interior motion sensor*/ tow-away protection* 58 5 * optional Page Function 8 Deactivates/activates Parktronic* 9 Activates/deactivates the seat heating* for the lefthand seat Page 122 69 31 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 32 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Centre console Lower section Function 1 2 Opens the stowage compartment 160 Socket 163 Opens the ashtray* 162 Cigarette lighter 163 Manual transmission: gear lever 92 AUTOTRONIC*: selector lever 94 3 Selects the drive program* 94 4 Parking brake 90 5 Adjusts the armrest* and opens the stowage compartment* 67 Opens the stowage compartment/telephone compartment* 160 Cup holder 144 6 7 32 Page * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 33 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Overhead control panel Overhead control panel Function Page 1 £ To switch the rear interior lighting on/off 82 2 ¥ To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off 82 a To open/close the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* 142 4 X To switch the righthand reading lamp on/off 82 5 Rear-view mirror 70 6 X To switch the lefthand reading lamp on/off 82 3 7 ð To switch the front interior lighting on/off 82 The arrangement of the controls may vary, depending on the equipment in the vehicle. Z * optional 33 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 34 Version: 2.10.6 At a glance Door control panel Door control panel Function 1 r Adjusts the exterior mirrors 71 2 Z Folds the exterior mirrors in/out* 71 3 & Selects the right exterior mirror 71 4 = Opens/closes the front side windows 84 5 = 5-door vehicle: opens/closes* the rear side windows 84 5-door vehicle: activates/ deactivates the override feature for the rear power side windows* 54 7 k Unlocks the vehicle 61 8 j Locks the vehicle 61 6 34 Page Function Page 9 Opens the door 61 a % Selects the left exterior mirror 71 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 35 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety .................................. 36 Driving safety systems ....................... 55 Anti-theft systems .............................. 57 35 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 36 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety Notes on occupant safety Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags, are coordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in defined accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, you should ensure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 63) Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 73) Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 39) Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 70) Rthe fied restraint systems have not been modi- i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. However, airbags are only an additional 36 restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. This is because - on the one hand - airbags are not deployed in all types of accident, as in some situations airbag deployment would not increase the protection afforded to vehicle occupants, provided they are wearing their seat belt correctly. On the other hand, airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the seat belt can more adequately prevent the occupant from being propelled towards the force of the impact, and is thus better suited to prevent injury Therefore, in accident situations where an airbag is deployed, it only provides protection in addition to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn correctly. G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk of an accident and injury. G Risk of injury The restraint system may not work as intended if the following components have been modified or work on these components has not been performed correctly: Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat belts and anchorages, belt tensioners, belt force limiters, airbags Rwiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail, e.g. in the event of an accident in which the deceleration force would normally be high enough to trigger the systems, or they could be triggered unintentionally. Never Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 37 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety carry out any modifications on the restraint systems. Never tamper with electronic components and their software. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) The SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. The SRS consists of: RThe 1 warning lamp Rbelt tensioners Rbelt force limiters Rairbags The 1warning lamp The SRS functions are checked regularly when you turn on the ignition and when the engine is running. Malfunctions can therefore be detected in good time. The 1 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. G Risk of injury If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or not be deployed in the event of an accident with heavy braking. A malfunction has occurred if the 1 warning lamp: Rdoes not light up when you switch on the ignition Rdoes not go out after the engine has been running for a few seconds Rlights up again once the engine is running In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags In the event of a collision, the sensor in the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data such as duration, direction and force of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration. Based on the evaluation of this data and depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, in the first stage the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners. The front airbags are only deployed if there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front airbags. When the first activation threshold is reached, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front airbag is only fully inflated if a second threshold is reached within a few milliseconds, due to the control unit having detected further deceleration. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and airbags In the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates the duration and direction of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in order to determine whether it is necessary to trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag must be deployed during – and not at the end of – the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. They are controlled by complex sensor technology and evaluation logic. This process is pre-emptive in nature as 37 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 38 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety airbag deployment must take place during the impact and must be adapted to provide calculated, additional protection for the vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. However, the deployment of each individual system will depend on the type of accident determined by the control system in the first stages of the collision (head-on collision, side impact and overturn) and the extent of the accident (in particular, the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration). The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are basically determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- cle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehicle Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a 38 decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of it. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the necessary deceleration does not occur. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformations. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are affected and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt force limiter, the force exerted by the seat belt on the seat occupant is reduced. Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back towards the backrest. The front belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which distribute the forces exerted by the belt force limiters on the occupant over a greater area. When the ignition is switched on, the belt tensioner is triggered: Ronly if the restraint systems are operational (the 1 warning lamp lights up after the ignition is switched on and goes out once the engine is running) (Y page 37) Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of impact If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that escapes does not generally constitute a health hazard. The 1 warning lamp lights up. G Risk of injury If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 39 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any MercedesBenz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. Airbags Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that escapes does not generally constitute a health hazard. The 1 warning lamp lights up. The SRS/AIRBAG identification indicates the location of the airbags. G Risk of injury Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is deployed: Rall vehicle occupants — in particular preg- nant women — must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back * optional against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the middle of the driver's front airbag cover as possible. Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, especially if a child is secured in a child restraint system on the seat. Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head on the area of the window in which a sidebag or head/thorax airbag* is deployed. RRearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The frontpassenger front airbag of a vehicle fitted with automatic child seat recognition* is only disabled when a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the front-passenger seat. The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp must be constantly lit. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition*, or your rearward-facing child restraint system does not have such a feature, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat, you must move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in pockets of clothing. Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. 39 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 40 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. Rmake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area of deployment of the airbag. Rdo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries caused by an airbag due to the high speed at which the airbag is required to deploy. G Risk of injury The airbag's functionality can only be guaranteed if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: Rpadded steering wheel boss Rfront-passenger Router Rside 40 front airbag cover side of front seats panel next to the rear seat backrest G Risk of injury When an airbag deploys, a small amount of powder is released. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G Risk of injury The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them, otherwise you may burn yourself. Have the airbags checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Front airbags The front airbags are designed to increase protection for the driver's and frontpassenger head and chest. The driver's front airbag and front-passenger front airbag are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently cle of other airbags in the vehi- Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction 1 Driver's front airbag 2 Front-passenger front airbag Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 41 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag 2 deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. On vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat*, frontpassenger front airbag 2 is only deployed if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp in the centre console is not lit (Y page 45). This means that there is not a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* fitted to the frontpassenger seat or that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* has been fitted to the front-passenger seat incorrectly. Head/thorax airbags, rear sidebags* i If you have specified windowbags* as optional equipment, the front seats of the vehicle will be equipped with sidebags instead of head/thorax airbags. G Risk of injury If you wish to use seat covers, MercedesBenz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. * optional The seat covers must have a special tear seam for head/thorax airbags. Otherwise, a head/thorax airbag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The purpose of head/thorax airbag deployment is to enhance the level of protection for the head and thorax (but not the arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The purpose of rear sidebag deployment is to enhance the level of protection for the thorax (but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. 1 Front head/thorax airbag 2 Rear sidebag in the side trim next to the backrest The front head/thorax airbags or rear sidebags inflate next to the outer seat cushion. Front head/thorax airbag 1 or rear sidebags 2 are deployed: Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of the seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Z 41 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 42 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Windowbags* The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame On 5-door vehicles, they are located between the front door (A-pillar) and the rear door (C-pillar). On 3-door vehicles, they are located between the front door (Apillar) and the rear inner wing (C-pillar). Windowbags 1 are deployed: i If you have specified windowbags* as The active head restraints are designed to increase protection to the driver's and frontpassenger's head and neck. In the event of a rear-end collision the force exerted by the driver's or front-passenger's chest causes the head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats to be moved forwards. This provides better head support. optional equipment, the front seats of the vehicle will be equipped with sidebags instead of head/thorax airbags. Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a lateral direction Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rindependently of the front airbags Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Active head restraints G Risk of injury Do not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers) on the head restraint rods. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not function correctly and could fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Children in the vehicle If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size and age of the child and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. You should fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Make sure that the child is secured in a child restraint system throughout the trip. You can obtain information about the correct child restraint system from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. Information about this can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint 1 Windowbag 42 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 43 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety system could heat up and the child could burn itself on them. If a child opens a door, the child or other persons could be injured as a result. The child could get out and be injured in the process or be injured by a passing vehicle. G Risk of injury An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load increases the risk of injury to the child in the event of: Ran accident Ra braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed on (Y page 47). * optional G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children of this size. RDo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under twelve years of age on the front-passenger seat. Exception: the child is secured in a vehicle with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat* and is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition. RIf you secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces occurring in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G Risk of injury The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with their original covers. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. For safety reasons, you should only use child restraint systems which have been 43 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 44 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Vehicles with a through-loading feature* in the rear seat backrest: do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system on the centre rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Child seat on the front-passenger seat Ron Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system G Risk of injury If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system Warning on the front-passenger sun visor on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the front-passenger front airbag deploying. This is especially a risk if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the frontpassenger front airbag when it deploys. Ra child must never be secured on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a 44 vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat* Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat* if there is no child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition fitted to the front-passenger seat. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat* if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is not lit. To draw attention to this danger, there is an appropriate warning sticker on the dashboard as well as on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 45 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. It is visible when you open the front-passenger door. G Risk of injury If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the frontpassenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the front-passenger front airbag is deployed, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. or Ronly 1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In such cases, 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 lights up. The frontpassenger airbag is deactivated. * optional use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions correctly, never place objects (such as a cushion) under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i The windowbag*, the head/thorax airbag and the belt tensioner for the frontpassenger seat are still active even if the front-passenger seat front airbag has been disabled by the automatic child seat recognition. G Risk of injury Do not place items of electronic equipment on the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, Rmobile when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This could lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp to light up without there being a child seat with automatic child seat recognition fitted. This means that the 45 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 46 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety front-passenger airbag does not deploy during an accident. It is also possible that the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp will not light up briefly if you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat Group 0: up to 10 kg; up to approx. 9 months Vehicles with automatic child Universal or as recommended seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: as recommended3 Universal or as recommended Universal or as recommended Universal or as recommended Group 0+: up to 13 kg; up to approx. 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg; between approx. 8 months and 4 years Universal4 or as recommended Child restraint system on the Child restraint system on the left-hand and right-hand rear centre rear seat seats Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; between approx. 3½ and 12 years 3 4 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition. Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost and uppermost position. 46 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 47 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Example of an approval label on the child restraint system Recommended child restraint systems Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition Group 0: up to 10 kg; up to approx. 9 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS5 E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes B6 6 86 8224 no6 A 000 970 10 00 Yes B6 6 86 8224 No6 BABY SAFE ISOFIX PLUS Group 0+: up to 13 kg; up to approx. 18 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS5 E1 03 301146 BABY SAFE ISOFIX PLUS 5 6 Z Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position. The child restraint system may only be fitted to the left-hand and right-hand rear seats. 47 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 48 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition Group I: 9 to 18 kg; between approx. 8 months and 4 years Britax-Römer DUO PLUS5 E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes A 000 970 16 00 No7 A 000 970 12 00 Yes A 000 970 17 00 No7 Category II/III: 15 to 36 kg Britax-Römer between approx. 3½ and 12 years ISOFIX child seat securing system in the rear compartment ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially-designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right rear seats. G Risk of injury A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If 5 7 KID5 E1 03 301148 the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder belt. G Risk of injury The child restraint system cannot perform its protective function if is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. On the rear seats, only use child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been recommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that it is engaged in the securing rings on both sides. G Risk of injury Please note that child restraint systems cannot provide a protective function if they or their retaining systems are damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. This Move the front-passenger seat to the highest position. For child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. 48 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 49 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety could result in serious or even fatal injuries to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. TopTether TopTether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX and the front-passenger seat. It helps reduce the risk of injury even further. Both TopTether anchorages are attached to the rear of the rear seat backrests. ! When fitting the child restraint system, 4 TopTether anchorage 5 TopTether hook* make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not become trapped. It could otherwise be damaged. 6 TopTether belt* for the ISOFIX child restraint system Move head restraint 1 upwards. Vehicles with a luggage compartment cover*: release rear seat backrest 2 (Y page 150) and fold it forwards slightly. X All: guide TopTether belt* 6 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint rods. X Fit TopTether hook* 5 into TopTether anchorage 4 on the back of rear seat backrest 2. X X 1 Head restraints 2 Rear seat backrests 3 Luggage compartment cover* 4 TopTether anchorages 1 Securing rings Z * optional 49 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 50 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Vehicles with a luggage compartment cover*: make sure you do not route the belt across luggage compartment cover 3. X Vehicles with a luggage compartment cover*: swing back rear seat backrest 2 until it engages. The red lock verification indicator is no longer visible (Y page 151). G Risk of injury Make sure that the rear seat backrest is fully locked. The red lock verification indicators on the left and right should no longer be visible. If they are, the rear seat backrests are not locked. If this is the case, occupants could be injured in the event of an accident, e.g. by objects being thrown forwards from the luggage compartment. All: move head restraints 1 slightly down again if necessary (Y page 66). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of TopTether belt* 6. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system with TopTether*. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X 50 Integrated child seat* The child seats are integrated into the right and left-hand sides of the seats of the rear bench seat. They comply with the legal requirements of ECE Regulation 44.03. Mercedes-Benz recommends the integrated child seat for children from approximately two to twelve years of age or with a body weight of 12.5 kg to 36 kg. For children between approximately two and four years of age or weighing between approximately 12.5 kg and 22 kg, you must also use a padded table* which has been specially approved for the integrated child seat (Y page 51). RReplace an integrated child seat that has been damaged or subjected to a heavy load as the result of an accident. RBe aware that children under two years of age require a different child restraint system. Information about other child restraint systems is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RThe rear seat backrest in the vehicle must be securely locked in position. Folding out the child seat G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RDo not modify the integrated child seat. RWhen the child seat is occupied, adjust the head restraint to a position at which the back of the child's head is supported by the centre of the head restraint at about eye level. 1 Release catch 2 Hook * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 51 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Press release catch 1. The child seat folds upwards. X Push the child seat back to the stop so that it engages. X Fastening a child's seat belt G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Pull the belt smoothly from the inertia reel. Guide the lower lap section of the belt through hook 2. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Make sure that the belt: Ris routed as low as possible across the pelvic area, in front of the hips X Ris tightened across the lap by pulling upwards on the child's shoulder belt RThe shoulder belt section of the seat belt must be routed across the middle of the child's shoulder – never across the child's neck – and be pulled tight against the child's chest. The lap section of the seat belt must be routed across the child's pelvis – not across the abdomen – and be pulled tight against the child's body; retighten the belt strap if necessary. RNever secure more than one child at a time in the child restraint system. RThe belt must be routed through the hook. RThe belt strap must not be trapped or twisted, nor rub against any sharp edges. * optional Folding in the child seat X Ris tight and is routed across the middle of the child's shoulder Ris not twisted and does not pass across the child's neck or under the child's arm X Adjust the head restraint (Y page 66) 1 Release catch X X Press release catch 1. Push the child seat back into the seat until it engages. Padded table*for the integrated child seat* For children between approximately two and four years of age or weighing between approximately 12.5 kg and 22 kg, you must also use a padded table which has been specially approved for the integrated child seat. You can obtain the approved padded table with ECE approval number 03301101 from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre under the order number B6 687 0096. 51 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 52 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety You must not use the integrated child seat with padded table directly attached to a baby car seat on which a body weight of up to 10 kg is permitted. G Risk of injury If the padded table is not installed and used correctly on the integrated child seat, it cannot provide the intended protection. It would then not be possible to restrain the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. For this reason, observe the following description when fitting the padded table: The padded table is only suitable for use together with the folded-out integrated child seat. On the rear seats, only use the padded table which is recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted padded table could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. Fit the padded table and ensure that it is correctly secured. 52 G Risk of injury If the padded table is damaged or subjected to a load in an accident, it cannot provide the intended protection. It would then not be possible to restrain the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. You must therefore have padded tables that are damaged or have been subjected to a heavy load in an accident checked immediately along with their mountings at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary. G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: Robserve the following description when fitting the padded table. Rdo not modify the padded table. RWhen the child seat is occupied, adjust the head restraint to a position at which the back of the child's head is supported by the centre of the head restraint at about eye level. Rreplace a damaged padded table or one that has been subjected to a load in an accident. Rbe aware that children under two years of age or children weighing less than 12.5 kg require a different child restraint system. Information about other child restraint systems is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Do not modify the padded table, integrated child seat or seat belts. The padded table must not be used without a cover. The cover must not be removed from the padded table or replaced with a cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise, the official approval becomes invalid and its protective function could be restricted. Do not subject the padded table to unnecessary heat nor expose it to direct sunlight. Parts of the padded table could heat up and the child could be burnt by the hot parts. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 53 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety ! Make sure that the padded table is not trapped or damaged, for example when you: Rclose the doors Radjust the seat Rstore the padded table or transport heavy objects Fitting the padded table 1 Head restraint 2 Padded table 3 Seat belt guide points 4 Hook 5 Left leg 6 Integrated child seat 7 Right leg Fold out integrated child seat 6 (Y page 50). X Place the child on integrated child seat 6. X Fold both legs 5 and 7 down. X Place padded table 2 over integrated child seat 6. X G Risk of injury Ensure that: Rthe belt is routed as described below Rthe belt is not twisted Rthe padded table is close to the child's body Rthe belt is routed through the hook Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and does not rub against any sharp edges It would otherwise not be possible to restrain the child in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and this could result in serious or even fatal injury to the child. Pull the belt smoothly from the inertia reel. Guide the lower section of the belt through hook 4. X Attach the lower and upper sections of the belt in left seat belt guide point 3. X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat belt guide point 3 and attach. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. X Slide padded table 2 close to the child's body. X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Ensure that the belt is not twisted. X Adjust the head restraint (Y page 66) X X Storing the padded table G Risk of injury The padded table must be secured in the vehicle correctly or stowed securely in the luggage compartment. It could otherwise become loose in the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt change in direction and could injure vehicle occupants or cause damage to the vehicle. X Fold in both legs 5 and 7. Z 53 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 54 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Occupant safety Child-proof locks If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors. Child-proof locks on the rear doors (5door vehicles) The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable you to secure each door individually. A locked door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can be opened from the outside if the vehicle is unlocked. G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear compartment side windows when children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. 1 To deactivate 2 To activate To activate: press latch 2 downwards. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X X To deactivate: press latch 1 upwards. 1 Switch X To activate/deactivate: press switch 1. Switch 1 engages or pops up. If the rear switch is engaged, you can only operate the rear side windows using the switches on the driver's door. Child-proof locks for the electric side windows in the rear*(5-door vehicle) G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear compartment side windows when children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could otherwise open doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. 54 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 55 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Driving safety systems Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) RSteering assistant STEER CONTROL i In wintry road conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. G Risk of accident The risk of an accident is significantly increased by driving too fast. This is particularly the case when cornering as well as on wet or slippery roads or when driving too close to the vehicle in front. The driving safety systems described in this section can neither reduce this risk nor override the laws of physics. For this reason, always adapt your driving style to suit prevailing road and weather conditions. Maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G Risk of accident ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G Risk of accident Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. Braking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit prevailing road and weather conditions. BAS (Brake Assist) BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Z 55 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 56 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Driving safety systems G Risk of accident If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you travel faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button (Y page 80). ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between tyres and the road surface. ESP® detects when a wheel spins or the vehicle starts to skid. ESP® stabilises the vehicle by targeted braking of individual wheels and by limiting engine power. It assists you when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® also stabilises the vehicle during braking. When ESP® intervenes, the v warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G Risk of accident If the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. Radapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! The ignition must be switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock), if: 56 Rthe parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised Application of the brakes by ESP® could otherwise destroy the brake system on the front axle. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Steering assistant STEER CONTROL The steering assistant STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid You have control over the steering at all times. G Risk of accident If there is an ESP® malfunction, you will not receive any steering assistance from the Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 57 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Anti-theft systems steering assistant STEER CONTROL. The steering continues to function with power assistance. Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. X To activate: remove the key from the ignition lock. X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. 1 Indicator lamp ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) A visual and audible alarm is triggered when the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Ra door using the emergency key element Rthe tailgate Rthe bonnet The alarm is not switched off even if you close a door again. To prime: lock the vehicle using the key. Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the key. X Deactivating the alarm X Insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is deactivated. or X Press the k or j button on the key. The alarm is deactivated. Z * optional 57 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 58 Version: 2.10.6 Safety Anti-theft systems Tow-away protection* and interior motion sensor* When tow-away protection and the interior motion sensor have been primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered, if: Rmotion is detected in the vehicle interior, e.g. if the side windows of the vehicle are smashed. Rthe inclination of your vehicle changes, e.g. if one end of your vehicle is raised. Priming tow-away protection and interior motion sensor Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed X Rthe panorama louvred sliding sunroof* is closed. Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hanging on the rear-view mirror or on the grab handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Deactivating tow-away protection and interior motion sensor To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the towaway protection and the interior motion sensor if your vehicle: Ris being transported or towed Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car transporter Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. splitlevel garages Ris locked while persons or animals remain inside Ris locked while the side windows remain open Ris locked and the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* remains open 1 To deactivate tow-away protection/inte- rior motion sensor 2 Indicator lamp Remove the key from the ignition lock. Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle using the key. Tow-away protection and the interior motion sensor remain deactivated until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. X X Lock the vehicle using the key. Tow-away protection and the interior motion sensor are primed after approximately 30 seconds. 58 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 59 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Opening and closing ........................... Key positions ....................................... Seats .................................................... Steering wheel .................................... Mirrors ................................................. Seat belts ............................................. Lights ................................................... Windscreen wipers ............................. Side windows ...................................... 60 62 63 70 70 73 77 83 84 Driving and parking ............................ 87 Transmission ....................................... 92 Instrument cluster .............................. 97 On-board computer ............................. 98 Driving systems ................................ 115 Air conditioning ................................. 129 Roof .................................................... 142 Loading and stowing ........................ 144 Features ............................................. 162 59 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 60 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing X Key The key centrally locks/unlocks: To change the setting: press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Rthe doors The key now functions as follows: Rthe tailgate X Rthe fuel filler flap G Risk of accident If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. 1 Battery check lamp 2 j To lock the vehicle 3 Emergency key element release catch 4 k To unlock the vehicle When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. When locking, they flash three times. If you do not open either a door or the tailgate after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. Individual settings You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This could be useful if you frequently travel on your own. 60 To unlock the driver's door: press the k button once. X To unlock centrally: press the k button twice. X To lock centrally: press the j button. Restoring the factory settings X Press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Additional information RConvenience closing (Y page 86) RConvenience opening (Y page 86) ROpening and closing in an emergency (Y page 241) Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 61 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Opening and closing Opening the doors from the inside You can open a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked. Automatic locking feature The vehicle will lock automatically once you have pulled away. You can switch off the automatic locking function via the on-board computer (Y page 111). i The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to turn. There is therefore a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. X X X Pull door handle 2. If the door is locked, locking knob 1 pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. G Risk of accident Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside – even if it is locked – and thereby endanger themselves and others. To lock: press button 1. To unlock: press button 2. Tailgate G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the tailgate is open. This could poison you. You should therefore make sure that the tailgate is always closed when the engine is running. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Z 61 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 62 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Key positions Opening from the outside Key positions You can only open the tailgate after unlocking it first. X To unlock centrally: press the k button on the key. Pull the tailgate down using recess 1. Push the tailgate closed from the outside. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the ‹ button on the key. X X Pull handle 1. X Raise the tailgate. X Closing from the outside G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the tailgate. i Do not leave the key in the luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 62 } To remove the key $ Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers % Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position & To start the engine i Even if the key is not for the vehicle in question, it will still turn in the ignition lock. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 63 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Seats Points to remember You can find information about enlarging the luggage compartment (folding forwards/ removing the rear seats) on (Y page 150). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically. G Risk of injury The seats can be adjusted when the key is removed and the door is open. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped when adjusting a seat. G Risk of accident Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G Risk of injury Observe the notes concerning the airbag system. Secure children as recommended; see "Children in the vehicle" section. Adjusting the seat manually ! When you move the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. i The front seats are fitted with active head restraints (Y page 42). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 66). Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. 1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 2 Seat cushion angle* 3 Seat height 4 Backrest angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Lift handle 1 and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release handle 1 again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage into position. X Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you adjust the seat. Z * optional 63 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 64 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Backrest angle X X Head restraint angle Relieve the pressure on the backrest. Turn handwheel 4 forwards or backwards. Seat height X Pull up or push down handle 3 repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seat cushion angle* 1 Release catch Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly supported. X Turn handwheel 2 forwards or backwards. X Head restraint height To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch 1 in direction of arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Push or pull the upper edge of the head restraint in direction of arrow. G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. 64 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 65 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Adjusting the seat electrically* Seat height X Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 5. X Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 1. Head restraint angle Seat cushion angle Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently supported. X Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 4. 1 Head restraint height 2 Backrest angle 3 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 4 Seat cushion angle 5 Seat height X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock or that the respective door is open. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide the button forwards or back in the direction of arrow 3. Backrest angle X Slide the button forwards or back in the direction of arrow 2. Head restraint height X Push or pull the upper edge of the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. Z * optional 65 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 66 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the head restraint height X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch 1 and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. Adjusting the angle of the outer head restraints X 1 Release catch 66 Pull the bottom of the head restraint forwards or push it backwards. Fitting and removing the rear-compartment head restraints G Risk of injury Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in the rear in the event of an accident. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 67 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Armrest* between the front seats You can slide the armrest forwards or backwards. Folding the front seat backrests forwards/EASY-ENTRY feature (3-door vehicle) G Risk of injury There is a risk of entrapment when you move the armrest. i There is a small stowage compartment underneath the armrest at the rear. This becomes accessible after you have moved the armrest forwards. 1 Release catch Fold the rear seat backrest forwards slightly in order to remove the head restraint. X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch 1 and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it click into place. X 1 Seat release i For easier access to the rear, you can slide the seat further forwards once you have folded the backrest forwards, as long as the seat is in the rear half of the adjustment range. 1 Armrest Moving the armrest X * optional Slide armrest 1 into the desired position. Z 67 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 68 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Folding the backrest forwards Lumbar support* Push the backrest backwards slightly, pull seat release 1 forwards and fold the backrest forwards until it engages. X Slide the seat forwards whilst pulling the seat release. X Swing the belt guide downwards. X The lumbar support for the front seats can be adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. Folding back the backrest Pull the seat release and slide the seat backwards until it engages. X Fold down the backrest until the seat and backrest engage. X Swing the belt guide up. X 1 Armrest ! Do not sit or lean on the armrest when it is folded down as you could otherwise damage it. X Armrest* (rear seat backrest) i There is a cup holder in the armrest (Y page 144). The armrest can be removed (Y page 147). 68 To fold the armrest down/up: swing armrest 1 all the way down or all the way up. ! Only fold the armrest up once you have 1 Adjustment lever X Move adjustment lever 1 until the desired backrest contour is achieved. closed the cup holder. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 69 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seats Multi-contour backrest* You can adjust the contour of the front seats individually so as to provide optimum support for your back. Upper back support X The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Use button 2 to adjust the upper back support to the desired position. Backrest side cushions X Use button 3 to adjust the backrest side cushions to the desired position. Seat heating* The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. X i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. 1 Lumbar region support 2 Upper back support 3 Backrest side cushions X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Lumbar region support X Use button 1 to adjust the lumbar region support to the desired position. 1 Seat heating i The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five minutes. * optional Z 69 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 70 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Mirrors Steering wheel Mirrors Rear-view mirror G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. When you adjust the steering wheel, make sure that: Rthe steering wheel can be reached with your arms slightly bent Ryou Ryou can move your legs freely can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you have a good overview of the traffic conditions. Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) 1 Release lever 2 Height adjustment 3 Fore-and-aft adjustment Pull handle 1 out completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push handle 1 in completely until you hear it engage. The steering wheel is locked in position. X 1 Anti-dazzle switch X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch 1 forwards or back. Rear-view mirror (automatic anti-dazzle*) The rear-view mirror automatically goes into anti-dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on 70 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 71 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Mirrors and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged and the interior lighting is switched on. G Risk of accident If the incident light from headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance by objects in the vehicle, the mirrors' automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then dazzle you. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. In this case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually. Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G Risk of accident The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. At low outside temperatures, the exterior mirrors are heated automatically. 1 Adjustment button 2 Right-hand exterior mirror 3 Left-hand exterior mirror Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 2 for the right-hand exterior mirror or button 3 for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button 1 as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button 1 up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirX 71 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 72 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Mirrors ror is set to a position which provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically* Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or has become discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. If this is not done, the exterior mirrors will not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 111). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button 1. can only fold out the exterior mirrors again using button 1. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically* 1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button 1. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. X i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 111): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. RThe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. i If you have activated this function and fold in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they will not be folded out automatically. You 72 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 73 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seat belts Seat belts Wearing seat belts Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with the vehicle interior. G Risk of injury A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must pass closely over your body and must not be twisted. You should therefore avoid wearing bulky clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt section must be routed across the middle of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. R3-door vehicle: the swivelling belt guide must be in the correct position. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, always secure these children in suitable child restraint systems on suitable vehicle seats. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting the child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G Risk of injury The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G Risk of injury A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or modified no longer offers the 73 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 74 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seat belts intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Choose a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. 3-door vehicle 1 Belt sash guide 5-door vehicle 1 Belt sash guide 2 Belt tongue 3 Buckle 2 Belt tongue 3 Buckle 4 Release button 5 Swivelling belt guide 4 Release button Routing the belt Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 63). X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash guide 1. X 74 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 75 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seat belts Route the belt over the centre of the shoulder without twisting it. X Engage belt tongue 2 into buckle 3. X 5-door vehicle: if necessary, adjust the belt to the appropriate height (Y page 75). X 3-door vehicles: make sure that swivelling belt guide 5 is in the correct position. X All: if necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the belt to tighten the belt across your body. X Routing the belt X Press release button 4 and guide belt tongue 2 back towards belt sash guide 1. Belt warning for driver and front passenger The < seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all passengers should fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. Additionally, there may be a warning tone. The < seat belt warning lamp goes out and the acoustic signal ceases as soon as the driver and passenger have fastened their seat belts. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger already have their seat belt fastened, the < seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine has been started. It then goes out when the driver and front passenger have already fastened their seat belts. i Further information about the < seat belt warning lamp (Y page 228). Belt height adjustment 5-door vehicles only: you can adjust the seat belt height on the driver's seat and frontpassenger seat. Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be routed across the middle of your shoulder. 1 Release catch To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold release button 1. X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Let go of release button 1 and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. X Z 75 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 76 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Seat belts Rear seat belt status indicator The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator tells you if the rear passengers have fastened their seat belts. The status indicator for the rear rear-compartment also tells you how many of the belt tongues are inserted into the seat belt buckles. The rear-compartment seat belt status indicator appears in the multi-function display for around 30 seconds if: i The status indicator for the rear-compartment seat belts is only available for certain countries. Correct driver's seat position Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result, you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. However, the steerability of the vehicle is not affected. set off and have reached a speed of approx. 10 km/h Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten their seat belts while driving gets in or out of the vehicle You can also cancel the messages immediately (Y page 202). The following messages appear in the multifunction display: R< No rear seat belt engaged R< 1 rear seat belt engaged R< 2 rear seat belts engaged R< 3 rear seat belts engaged 76 Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. G Risk of accident Ryou Rsomeone G Risk of accident X 1 Steering wheel 2 Seat belt 3 Seat Check whether seat 3 and the head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 63). Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 77 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights Make sure that: It should: Ryou are as far away from the driver's front Rfit airbag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi- Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly tion Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint X Check whether steering wheel 1 is adjusted properly (Y page 70). Make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your Lights snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rrouted joints in your pelvic area across the hip Light switch For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, daytime operation of headlamps varies due to legal and voluntary requirements. In these countries, the constant headlamp mode is automatically switched on when the engine is started. i If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps changed to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in these countries. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly X Check whether you have fastened seat belt 2 properly (Y page 73). Z 77 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 78 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights while the ignition is switched off (ignition key in position 0). i When you turn the light switch to any position other than M or U, the corresponding light goes on. ! Switch off the side lamps and parking lamp when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. Dipped-beam headlamps Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X To switch on: turn the light switch to B. X $ a Left-hand parking lamp % g Right-hand parking lamp8 & M Lights off/constant headlamp mode ( U Automatic headlamp mode/con)C *B ,¥ .† stant headlamp mode Side lamps, licence plate and instrument lighting Dipped-beam headlamps or mainbeam headlamps foglamps* Rear foglamp i The exterior lighting (except for side lamps and parking lamps) automatically switches off when you remove the key from the ignition lock or open the driver's door 8 Constant headlamp mode In countries in which constant headlamp mode is not a legal requirement, you can make this a setting using the on-board computer. You can activate or deactivate "constant headlamp mode" using the on-board computer (Y page 109). X To switch on: turn the light switch to M or U. The dipped-beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. Automatic headlamp mode G Risk of accident When the light switch is set to U, the lights are not switched on automatically in foggy conditions. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to B in darkness and fog. Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. G Risk of accident When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch from U to B in good time. Otherwise, the headlamps could switch off temporarily and you could cause an accident. X To switch on: turn the light switch to U. Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the side lamp is switched on or off automatically, depending on the brightness of the ambient light. You must turn the light switch beyond its resistance point when turning it from the M position to the g position. 78 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 79 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights Starting the engine: the dipped-beam headlamps are also switched on or off automatically, depending on the brightness of the ambient light. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the B indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Front foglamps*/Rear foglamp G Risk of accident If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to B before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could endanger yourself and others. When the light switch is set to U you cannot switch on the front* or rear foglamps. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on the front foglamps*: turn the light switch to the B or C position. X Pull the light switch out to the first detent. The ¥ green indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the light switch to B or C. X On vehicles with front foglamps*, pull the light switch out to the second detent. On vehicles without front foglamps*, pull the light switch out to the detent. The † yellow indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps*/rear foglamp: push in the light switch to the stop. The corresponding indicator lamp goes out. Combination switch (turn signals, main-beam headlamps and headlamp flasher) Turn signal lamp X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 2 or ?. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp K or L in the instrument cluster flashes. i If you only wish to indicate a minor change of direction, press the combination switch briefly in the appropriate direction. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. Z * optional 79 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 80 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights Main-beam headlamps Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to B or U9. X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Hazard warning lamps X Headlamp flasher X To switch on: briefly pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps to suit the vehicle load. You can only adjust the headlamp range while the engine is running. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. They switch on automatically if an airbag is deployed or if you brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a halt from a speed of more than 70 km/h. X To switch on: press button 1. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch (Y page 79), only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X 9 To switch off: press button 1. In the U position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark. 80 Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) Position Load 0 Driver's seat and frontpassenger seat occupied 1 Driver's seat, frontpassenger seat and rear seats occupied Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 81 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights Position Load 2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied, luggage compartment laden 3 X Not required Turn headlamp range control 1 to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Headlamp cleaning system* The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. * optional When in reverse gear: the cornering lamp on the outside of the bend comes on. Cornering light function* (bi-xenon headlamps*) Specially designed headlamps light up the area into which you are driving when turning corners. If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signals or when the steering wheel is turned. If you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h the cornering light function is deactivated. Activating Start the engine. Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps. X Switch off the foglamps*. X Switch on the turn signal. The cornering lamp on the same side as the turn signal comes on, even if you turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction after indicating. or X Turn the steering wheel in the desired direction. When in a forwards gear: the cornering lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. X Deactivating X Turn the steering wheel back to the straight ahead position. The turn signal goes off. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time. or Switch off the turn signal. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time. The cornering light will go out after a maximum of three minutes. X X Z 81 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 82 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Lights Interior lighting Front overhead control panel (vehicles with a rocker switch) 1 ð To switch the interior lighting on 2 To switch the automatic interior lighting control on 3 ¥ To switch the interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 4 X To switch the reading lamp on/off Front overhead control panel (vehicles with buttons*) 1 £ To switch the rear interior lighting Rear-compartment overhead control panel 1 To switch the reading lamp* off 2 Automatic interior lighting control 3 4 5 on/off ¥ To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off ð To switch the front interior lighting on/off 2 To switch the reading lamp* on To switch on (vehicles with a rocker switch): set the rocker switch to centre position 2. X To switch on (vehicles with buttons*): press the ¥ button. X To switch off (vehicles with a rocker switch): set the rocker switch to the ¥ position. X To switch off (vehicles with buttons*): press the ¥ button. The interior lighting automatically switches on when it is dark, when you unlock the vehiX 82 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 83 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Windscreen wipers cle, open a door or remove the key from the ignition lock. The interior lighting switches off after a delay. You can set the delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 110). If the door is left open, the interior lighting goes out after approximately five minutes. Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. X Emergency accident lighting If the interior lighting is set to automatic, the interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To deactivate: press the hazard warning lamp button (Y page 80). or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the key. If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. Windscreen wipers Rear window wiper Combination switch 1 To switch on the windscreen wipers 2 Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using washer fluid Settings: 0 Windscreen wipers off I Intermittent wipe II Continuous wipe, slow III Continuous wipe, fast ! Vehicles with a rain sensor*: * optional Combination switch 1 Switch % To wipe with washer fluid Z 83 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 84 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Side windows & To switch on intermittent wiping ( To switch off intermittent wiping ) To wipe with washer fluid Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on the icon appears in the instrument cluster. X Side windows Opening/closing the side windows G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame when a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves down. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. G Risk of injury Children may injure themselves if they operate the side windows. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when 84 leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring themselves or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 85 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Side windows i Related topics: Rconvenience opening (Y page 86) Rconvenience closing (Y page 86) X i You can still operate the side windows when the key is in the 0 position or when the key has been removed. However, this is only possible for a maximum of five minutes afterwards, or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Roverride controls in the rear compartment (Y page 54) The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. To open: press the corresponding switch. X To close: pull the corresponding switch. X i If you operate the switch beyond its pres- sure point, it will trigger automatic operation in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing again. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature 1 Front left 2 Front right 3 Rear right 4 Rear left G Risk of injury Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows. If a side window blocks during closing and reopens slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull on the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window blocks again during closing and reopens slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull on the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Resetting the side windows You must reset each side window if: Rthe battery has been disconnected or has become discharged. Rthe side window no longer opens or closes fully. Rthe side windows open again slightly after being closed fully. Z 85 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 86 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Side windows Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch until the side window is closed. X Hold the switch for an additional second. X Convenience closing* When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: If the side window opens again slightly: X You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. To do this, you can use the key to simultaneously: Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* or move it to the ventilation position i The "Convenience opening" feature can only be operated using the key. 86 the side windows Rclose the panorama louvred sliding sun- roof* Pull the corresponding switch again immediately and hold it for approx. one second. Convenience opening* Rclose G Risk of injury Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the k button. X Keep the k button pressed until the side windows are in the desired position. The panorama louvred sliding sunroof* stops in the ventilation position. X To open the panorama louvred sliding sunroof*: press and hold the k button again until the panorama louvred sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. X When using the convenience closing feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: Rrelease the j button. Rpress and hold the k button until the side windows and the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* open again. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 87 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving and parking Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Lock the vehicle with the j button. X Press and hold the j button until the side windows and the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* are closed. X Driving and parking Starting the engine G Risk of accident Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that they are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Objects could otherwise get between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. You may then no longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate as intended. This may result in an accident and injury. G Risk of poisoning Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. i If you depress the brake when starting the engine, pedal travel will be unusually long and there will be less pedal resistance. Manual transmission Vehicles without ECO Start-Stop-Function* (5speed manual transmission) ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Z * optional 87 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 88 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving and parking Further information about the manual transmission (Y page 92). Starting the engine i Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: You can also use the touch-start function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 and release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. AUTOTRONIC* To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 62) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 62). The q preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the q preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 and release it as soon as the engine is running. X Vehicles with ECO Start-Stop-Function* Park position with selector lever lock To select reverse gear To select neutral Drive position X Before starting, make sure P is selected. P R N D i The engine can also be started when the Vehicles without ECO Start Stop function* (6speed manual transmission) Depress the brake pedal. Depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral. X Start the engine. X selector lever is in position N. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. X Release the parking brake (Y page 90). Further information about AUTOTRONIC (Y page 94). X 88 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 89 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving and parking Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) The ECO start/stop function automatically switches on the engine as soon as you prepare to pull away, e.g. by engaging a gear. X Depress the clutch pedal. The engine starts automatically. X Shift to either first or reverse gear and pull away. Pulling away the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 111). i When manoeuvring in and out of parking spaces, the ECO start/stop function will not automatically switch off the vehicle's engine. The engine will only be switched off automatically if the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 15 km/h before coming to a standstill again. i The system can differentiate between starting the engine with the key and the automatic engine start via the ECO start/ stop function. * optional ning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use ! Do not engage a gear without depressing the clutch as this disables the automatic engine start function. As a result, the battery cannot be recharged and the demister function of Thermotronic* is not available. ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- AUTOTRONIC* i It is only possible to move the selector lever to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. The selector lever lock is released. X Release the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. X i Wait until the shift process is completed before pulling away. X Release the brake pedal. Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Manual transmission X Depress the brake pedal. X Depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to either first or reverse gear. X Release the parking brake (Y page 90). X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. i Upshifts take place at higher engine X speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Z 89 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 90 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving and parking Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away on uphill gradients. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G Risk of accident Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. After approximately one second, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. i Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around one second. Pull away. Hill start assist does not function if: X Rthe vehicle is secured with the parking brake. RESP® Parking brake is malfunctioning. Parking G Risk of accident Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary as you cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G Risk of fire Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or petrol. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. 1 Parking brake 2 Release button X To apply: pull parking brake 1 up firmly. The 3 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient. Ron vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*, the selector lever is in the N position. 90 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 91 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving and parking To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. On vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*, the selector lever lock is released. X Press release button 2 on parking brake 1 and move the parking brake down to the stop. The 3 warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Switching off the engine G Risk of accident If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then takes much more effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Do not switch off the engine while driving. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* Move the selector lever to P. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. X Shift to neutral N and release the clutch pedal. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. The engine is automatically switched off and the ECO start/stop function is shown in the multi-function display. X Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function*) The ECO start/stop function automatically switches off the engine as soon as you stop the vehicle, e.g. at traffic lights. X Brake the vehicle until it comes to a standstill. The shift instruction appears in the multifunction display. Example illustration: ECO display Vehicles with manual transmission X X Shift to either first or reverse gear. Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. * optional Z Example illustration: gearshift instruction 91 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 92 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Transmission Transmission Notes on the transmission Manual transmission 5-speed manual transmission G Risk of accident Neutral Nwith ECO Start-Stop-Function*activated The transmission must be in neutral N for the engine to switch off when: The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. X G Risk of accident ! Only engage reverse gear when the vehi- Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. the engine is running below a certain speed. X the brake pedal is depressed. X the clutch pedal is not depressed. Engaging reverse gear Vehicles without ECO Start-Stop-Function* (5speed manual transmission) cle is stationary, otherwise the transmission could be damaged. X Move the gear lever to the right and then back. Vehicles with ECO Start-Stop-Function* 92 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 93 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Transmission 6-speed manual transmission use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to prevent the vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Engaging reverse gear ! Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise the transmission could be damaged. Vehicles without ECO Start-Stop-Function* (6speed manual transmission) ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, you should always push the gear lever all the way to the right. You could otherwise shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. Do not exceed the maximum speed for the individual gears. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overrev, leading to engine damage. X Pull the gear lever up, move it to the left and then back. Gearshift indicator (BlueEFFICIENCY*vehicles) i Observing the gearshift indicator in the instrument cluster's multi-function display will help you to improve the fuel economy of your vehicle. 1 Upshift indicator Shift up or down a gear when the corresponding indicator appears in the instrument cluster's multi-function display. The shift indicator is meant as a recommendation for an economical driving style. However, always observe traffic conditions, as your driving style is determined, in the first instance, by the traffic situation. X ! On long and steep downhill gradients, especially when the vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear in time. This will * optional Z 93 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 94 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Transmission Selector lever positions AUTOTRONIC* (continuously variable automatic transmission) AUTOTRONIC is an electronically controlled, continuously variable automatic transmission. The transmission ratio is changed continuously. This enables it to be ideally adapted to your individual driving styles and to provide increased driving comfort. 1 Drive program (C/S) or (C/S/M)* 2 Gear indicator If you have selected one-touch gearshifting or selector lever position D, you can see the currently engaged gear in the multi-function display. You can influence the AUTOTRONIC transmission ratio when the selector lever is in position D by changing gear yourself―see One-touch gearshifting (Y page 95). 94 ì Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only move the selector lever to P when the vehicle is stationary. The key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked in position P. í Reverse gear Only move the selector lever to R when the vehicle is stationary. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 95 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Transmission ë ê Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only move the selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Drive The transmission selects the optimum gear ratio automatically for forward mode. One-touch gearshifting (manual operation) When the selector lever is in position D, you can select the seven gears yourself. Activating manual operation X Press the selector lever lightly to the left towards D- or to the right towards D+. M is shown in the multi-function display. Manual operation is activated. X To shift down: briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. The transmission shifts down to the next gear, depending on the gear currently selected. i To prevent the engine from overrevving, the transmission does not shift down if you push the selector lever towards D– while driving at too high a speed. i AUTOTRONIC shifts down automatically if the engine speed reaches the lower speed range for the gear currently selected. X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. The transmission shifts up to the next gear, depending on the gear currently selected. i If the upper engine speed limit for the gear currently engaged is reached and you continue to accelerate, AUTOTRONIC shifts up automatically. X Deactivating manual operation X Press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown again in the multi-function display. The transmission shifts from the current gear to D. Or: X Briefly press the program selector button next to the selector lever. The letter for the last selected drive program C or S is shown again in the multifunction display. The transmission shifts from the current gear to D. i If you restart the engine and M manual operation is selected, AUTOTRONIC shifts into the automatic drive program C or S. If automatic drive program C or S has been selected, the automatic transmission will resume the relevant drive program when you restart the engine. To select the ideal gear: press and hold the selector lever to the left towards D–. The transmission will shift to a range which allows ideal acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the transmission will shift down one or more gears. Z 95 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 96 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Transmission Program selector button The button is on the lower section of the centre console. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Ran increase in traction: this improves the driving stability of the vehicle on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe transmission shifting up sooner: the vehicle is driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels are less likely to spin. Driving tips 1 Program selector button C Comfort comfortable driving style S Sport sporty driving style The selected drive program (C/S) is shown in the multi-function display (Y page 94). X Press program selector button 1 repeatedly until the letter for the desired drive program appears in the multi-function display (Y page 94). Comfort mode C is characterised by the following: 96 Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how AUTOTRONIC shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The transmission shifts back up. Trailer towing X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to 3rd or 2nd gear depending on the incline of the uphill or downhill gradient(Y page 95), even if cruise control is activated. Working on the vehicle G Risk of accident Apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to P when working on the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle could roll away. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 97 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Points to remember Activating the multi-function display X Switch on the ignition. X You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 26). G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display fails. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting Brighter or dimmer: briefly turn reset button 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise to the stop and release. The brightness of the instrument cluster lighting changes by one level. There are several possible levels. Coolant temperature gauge The multi-function display is also activated when you: Rswitch on the lights Rpress reset button 1 Ropen the driver's door The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †. The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Z 97 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 98 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Resetting the trip meter Select the Standard display menu (Y page 103). X Press and hold the reset button on the lefthand side of the instrument cluster until the trip meter is reset. X Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. H Environmental note Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this increases your vehicle's consumption unnecessarily and pollutes the environment through increased emissions. 98 Clock On vehicles without an audio system or with Audio 5*/Audio 20*, you can set the time using the on-board computer (Y page 109). Outside temperature display G Risk of accident The road surface may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges, even if temperatures are just above freezing point. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. You should therefore always adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather conditions. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. On-board computer Points to remember The on-board computer is activated as soon as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can use the on-board computer to call up information relating to your vehicle and to make and adjust settings. G Risk of accident Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. Multi-function steering wheel You can control the multi-function display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 99 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer 4 jk Scrolls back/forth within a menu j k Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*: Press and hold: in the Audio*/ DVD* menu, selects the next/previous station or selects an audio track using rapid scrolling. In the Telephone* menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book. j k Audio 5*: Press briefly: in the Audio* menu, selects an audio track or, depending on the settings, selects a stored or the next/previous station. 1 Multi-function display 2 æç RSelects submenus in the Settings menu RChanges RAdjusts 3 values the volume st Accepts or rejects/ends a call* * optional j k Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*: Press briefly: in the Audio*/ DVD*menu, selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number. 5 èÿ Selects a menu: scrolls back and forth Several functions are combined thematically in the menus. In the Audio*/DVD* menu you will find functions used to operate the radio* or CD player*, for instance. The functions can be used either to call up information or to change settings for your vehicle. You can think of the configuration of the menus and the functions within a menu as a circle: X Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly to call up individual menus in sequence. X Press the k or j button to call up the functions within a menu. 99 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 100 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Unlike other menus, the Settings menu contains a number of submenus (Y page 106). Multi-function display Values, settings and display messages are shown in the multi-function display. 1 Display area for menus or submenus 2 Status bar with outside temperature or speed (Y page 108) 100 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 101 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Menus and submenus Z 101 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 102 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Function Function 1 Operation menu (Y page 102) Rtrip meter and total distance recorder (standard display) (Y page 103) Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 179) Rdigital speedometer or outside tem- perature (Y page 103) RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 191) REngine player* (Y page 104) Raudio drive or media* (Y page 104) RDVD video* (Y page 105) 3 Navigation* menu (NAV) (Y page 105) 10 The 102 5 Settings menu (Y page 106) Rresetting to factory settings (Y page 106) Rselecting submenus (Y page 107) 6 Trip computer menu (Y page 112) Rconsumption statistics (Y page 112) Rrange (Y oil level* (Y page 173) 2 Audio*/DVD*menu (Y page 103) Rradio station (Y page 103) RCD 4 Message memory10 menu (Display messages) (Y page 106) page 113) 7 Telephone* menu (Y page 113) The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle. The generic terms in the table overview are intended to help you navigate through the menus. The terms themselves are not always displayed in the multi-function display. For the Audio 5*, the on-board computer displays the Audio* and Telephone* menus in English. The language for these menus is not dependent on the language selected for the multi-function display. Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* and COMAND APS*: Depending on the audio system* fitted, the Audio*, Navigation* and Telephone* menus are slightly different. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND APS*. Operation menu i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select the standard display. You can select the following functions in the Operation menu by pressing the j or k button: Rtrip meter and total distance recorder (standard display) Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 179) Rdigital ture speedometer or outside tempera- menu is only visible when there is a display message. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 103 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer RASSYST Selecting a radio station Rengine You can only store new stations using the audio system* or COMAND APS* (see separate operating instructions). PLUS service interval display (Y page 191) oil level* (Y page 173) Standard display Switch on the audio system* or COMAND APS* and select Radio (see separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/DVD menu. X Digital speedometer (example) X 1 Trip meter 2 Total distance Displaying the digital speedometer or outside temperature If you have selected the digital speedometer for the status line (Y page 108), select the outside temperature display here11. Press the j or k button to select digital speedometer 1 or the outside temperature. Audio*/DVD* menu Audio 5*: X Press the j or k button to select the desired station. The type of search depends on the radio station selection settings (Y page 111). The next stored station is selected, or the station search starts. Use the functions in the Audio/DVD menu to operate the audio equipment* or COMAND APS*. i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Z 11 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is displayed permanently. * optional 103 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 104 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS*or COMAND APS*: To select a stored station: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and hold the j or k button. X To select a station using the station search (only if no station list is received): press and hold the j or k button. X i DAB* radio mode13 (Digital Audio Broadcasting) (see separate operating instructions). Operating the CD player (Audio 5*) You can play MP3/WMA CDs in the Audio 5* drive. Switch on the audio system* and select the CD player (see separate operating instructions). X Press the è or · button to select the Audio menu. X Press the j or k button to select a CD track. X CD player display (example) 1 Function (the CD number is also shown with a CD changer*) 2 Current track Operating the audio player or audio media*(Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS*or COMAND APS*) 1 Waveband12 2 Station Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio system* or COMAND APS* and select the audio player or 12 When 13 Only 104 station ; has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed. for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 105 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer medium (see separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/DVD menu. X To select next/previous track: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the j or k button. Operating the DVD video* Switch on COMAND and select DVD video (see separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/DVD menu. X Press the j or k button to select a scene. X Navigation* menu In the Navigation menu, the navigation instructions from the navigation system appear in the multi-function display. i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or ÿ button to select the Navigation menu. X Switch on the audio system* or COMAND APS* (see separate operating instructions). Route guidance inactive CD changer display (example) 1 Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*) DVD changer display (example) 1 Current DVD (for DVD changer*) 2 Current scene 2 Current track The current track will not be displayed in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Z Direction of travel display (example) * optional 105 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 106 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer The direction of travel 1 appears in the multifunction display. Route guidance active The multi-function display shows navigation instructions, for example: Message memory menu Previous display messages can be called up in the Message memory menu. The Message memory menu is visible only when there is a display message. i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Press the è or · button repeatedly until either the original menu or the Message memory menu appears. When there are display messages, 2 messages appears in the multi-function display, for example. X Use the j or k button to scroll through the display messages. X G Risk of accident The on-board computer only records and displays messages and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to drive. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. i All possible display messages are explained in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 202). Switching off the ignition clears all display messages except for the highest priority display messages. When the causes of the highpriority display messages are rectified, these display messages will be erased. Displaying messages Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. 106 Settings menu In the Settings menu, you will find the Settings To reset Press reset button for 3 seconds function, with which you can restore most settings to the factory settings. You will also find submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Resetting to factory settings For safety reasons, not all functions will be reset: permanent Speedtronic* can only be set in the Vehicle submenu. The Settings Headlamps function in the Lighting sub* optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 107 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer menu will only be reset if the vehicle is stationary. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press and hold the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. A prompt appears in the multi-function display asking you to confirm by pressing the reset button again. X Press the reset button again. The functions of most submenus are restored to factory settings. or X If you want to retain the settings, do not press the reset button a second time. The Settings menu appears again after approximately 5 seconds. X Press the è or · button to select a different menu. Submenus in the Settings menu Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. A list of submenus is displayed. The list contains more submenus than can be displayed at the same time. X Press the æ or ç button to change the setting. The changed setting is stored. X Press the è or ÿ button to select a different display. The following tables show the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the pages shown. X Instrument cluster submenu RUnit of measurement for distance (Y page 108) RLanguage (Y RStatus page 108) line display (Y page 108) Time/date submenu14 Press the æ or ç button to select a submenu. The selected submenu is highlighted. X Press the j button to select a function within the submenu. X RTime and date (Y page 109) Z 14 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS*. * optional 107 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 108 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Lighting submenu RConstant headlamp mode (daytime driving lights) (Y page 109) RSurround lighting* (Y page 110) RExterior lighting delayed switch-off* (Y page 110) RInterior lighting delayed switch-off (Y page 110) Vehicle submenu RPermanent RRadio Speedtronic* (Y page 120) station selection *(Y page 111) RAutomatic locking feature (Y page 111) Convenience submenu* RFold the exterior mirrors in when locking the vehicle* (Y page 111) 15 Vehicles 108 Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe digital speedometer15 Rthe navigation instruction in the Navigation* menu RSpeedtronic* Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Display unit Speed/odom. X Press æ or ç to select km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of measurement for distance. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting the language Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Language. X Press the æ or ç button to select the desired language. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X X Selecting the status line display Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Instr. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Status line display. for the United Kingdom: the digital speedometer always displays km/h. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 109 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Press the æ or ç button to select the status line display: outside temperature (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). The selected display now appears constantly in the lower multi-function display. When you scroll through the Operation menu (Y page 102), you will see the display you have not selected. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Setting the date and time Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following audio systems*: A: Audio 5* or Audio 20* B: Audio 50 APS* C: COMAND APS* You can see which audio system* is fitted in your vehicle by referring to the separate operating instructions. Depending on the audio system*, the time and date are received from GPS satellites and cannot be set using the on-board computer (see the following table). X * optional A B C Set using the on-board computer Automatic GPS satellite reception X X X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Time/Date submenu. X Setting the time Press the j button to select Time Hours (or Time Minutes). X Press the æ or ç button to set a value. X Setting the date Press the j button to select Date Set day (or Date Set month or Date Set year). X Press the æ or ç button to set the date. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Setting constant headlamp mode (daytime driving lights) When you activate constant headlamp mode and the light switch is set to M or U, the parking lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate lighting are switched on automatically when the engine is running. Turning the light switch to a different position switches on the corresponding lights. Turn the light switch to B or U first if you wish to switch off constant headlamp mode while driving in the dark. In countries in which constant headlamp mode is a legal requirement, Constant is the factory setting. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. 109 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 110 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Headlamp mode. X Press the æ or ç button to set the switch-on mode for the headlamps to Manual or Constant (constant headlamp mode). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Switching the surround lighting*on/off If the surround lighting is switched on, the following lights will be switched on automatically in the dark after you have unlocked the vehicle using the key: Rthe side lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps* The surround lighting switches off automatically after 40 seconds or when the driver's door is opened. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. 110 Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Surround lighting. X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Surround lighting on or off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Activating or deactivating the exterior lighting delayed switch-off* When you activate the Headl. delayed switch-off function, the exterior lighting remains on for another 15 seconds after closing the doors when it is dark. If the engine is switched off and then none of the doors are opened, or if an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds. If you have activated the delayed switch-off function and switched off the engine, the following remain lit: Rthe side lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps* Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Headl. delayed switch-off. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Headl. delayed switch-off function. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. To temporarily deactivate the switch-off delay: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. Delayed switch-off is deactivated. When you start the engine again, the switchoff delay is reactivated. X Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off If you remove the key from the ignition lock while the Interior lighting delayed * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 111 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer switch off function is activated, the interior lighting remains on for 10 seconds if it is dark. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Inter. lighting delay.sw.off. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate Inter. lighting delay.sw.off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Setting the radio station selection* This function is only available in conjunction with Audio 5*. The Audio Search allows you to set whether a new station is searched for every time you switch on the radio* or a previously stored station is selected. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. * optional Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the j button to select Audio search. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Frequency or Memory setting. If the Frequency setting is selected, the station search is started. If the Memory setting is selected, the next stored station is selected. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking feature When you activate the Automatic door locking function, your vehicle will be centrally locked above a speed of approx. 15 km/h. i For more information on the automatic door locking feature, see (Y page 61). Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the j button to select Automatic door lock. X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Automatic door lock feature on or off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X Activating or deactivating the Fold in mirrors when locking*function When you activate the Fold mirr. in when locking function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. When you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door with the Fold in mirrors when locking function activated (Y page 72), the exterior mirrors do not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings menu. X Press the j button to select submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Convenience submenu. 111 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 112 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Press è or · to select After start. X Press j or k to select After reset. Press the j button to select Fold in mirrors when locking. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate Fold in mirrors when locking. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X X Trip computer menu You can use the Trip computer menu to call up or reset statistical data for your vehicle. 1 Distance 2 Time i Please refer to the menu overview 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption You can select km or miles as the unit of measurement for distance (Y page 108). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. The trip computer is automatically reset From start when Rthe ignition is switched off for more than 4 hours (Y page 101). Trip computer from start The values refer to the start of the journey. X Press è or · to select After start. 112 R999 hours have been exceeded R9999 kilometres have been exceeded Trip computer from reset The values refer to the last reset of the function. 1 Distance 2 Time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption The trip computer is automatically reset From reset if the trip exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 113 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Resetting Using è or ·, select From start. X Press the j or k button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press and hold the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster until the values have reverted to "0". X Telephone menu* Functions and displays depend on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket* (Y page 164), or set up a Bluetooth connection to the audio system* or COMAND APS* (see separate operating instructions). Calling up the range G Risk of accident Using è or ·, select From start. X Press the j or k button to select Range:. The multi-function display shows the estimated range of the vehicle, based on the current driving style and the fuel level. If there is only a small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, a vehicle refuelling ¿ appears instead of the range. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating a mobile phone in the vehicle. If it is permitted to operate a mobile phone while the vehicle is in motion, only operate it when road and traffic conditions permit. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. X i Please refer to the menu overview (Y page 101). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Switch on the mobile phone and audio equipment* or COMAND APS* (see separate operating instructions). X Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. X Mobile phone on PIN code not yet entered Once you have inserted the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket*, the multi-function display shows the PIN display message. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Linguatronic*, the audio system* or COMAND APS*. The mobile phone will search for a network. Mobile phone operational You will see Ready or the name of the mobile phone network provider in the multi-function display. If the operational readiness symbol of the mobile phone goes out, your vehicle is outside the transmission and reception range. In this case you will see No Service in the multi-function display. Z * optional 113 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 114 Version: 2.10.6 Controls On-board computer Accepting a call If you receive a call while you are in the Telephone menu, the multi-function display shows a display message, for example. Press the s button to accept the call. You can still answer a call if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Rejecting or ending a call Press the t button. You can still reject or end a call if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Dialling a number from the phone book You can enter new telephone numbers via the mobile phone in the phone book (see sepa- 114 rate operating instructions). If your mobile phone is operational, you can select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. X Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the j or k button to call up the phone book. X Press the j or k button to select the desired name. To scroll rapidly, press and hold the j or k button for longer than 1 second. X Press the s button to start dialling. The Connecting call... message appears in the multi-function display. The number dialled is stored in the redial memory. The multi-function display shows the dialled telephone number. If the name is stored in the phone book, it is shown instead of the telephone number. or X If you do not want to make a call, press the t button. Redialling The on-board computer stores the most recently dialled names and numbers from the redial memory. X Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the s button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the j or k button to select the desired name or telephone number. X Press the s button to start dialling. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 115 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Driving systems Overview of driving systems The vehicle's driving systems are described on the following pages: RCruise control* and Speedtronic*, which are used to control the speed of the vehicle RParktronic* and active parking assist*, which can help you to find a parking space, to manoeuvre and park RECO Start-Stop function*, helps you to save fuel The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP® and STEER CONTROL driving safety systems are described in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 55). Cruise control* Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. * optional G Risk of accident Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. 115 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 116 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected Selecting cruise control X When selecting another gear, press the accelerator pedal slightly to increase the smoothness of the gear change. When you depress the clutch pedal and change to another gear, the engine speed can increase slightly while no gear is selected. Ralways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is on, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. Storing and maintaining the current speed 1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 Calling up the last speed stored 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between cruise control and var- iable Speedtronic 6 Deactivating cruise control 116 You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h. X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill and downhill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient levels out. Vehicles with manual transmission: Rchange gear in good time. Rif possible, do not change down several gears at a time. Calling up the last speed stored G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 117 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Setting a speed Deactivating cruise control Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: i Cruise control is not deactivated if you or X depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. i Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: When you decelerate the vehicle using the cruise control lever, AUTOTRONIC changes down if deceleration is insufficient. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/hincrements X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. * optional X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. or X Brake. Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if, for example: X Raquaplaning is detected Ryou press the clutch pedal for more than four seconds on vehicles with a manual transmission Ryou move the selector lever to N while driv- ing in vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* i The last speed stored is cleared when you Speedtronic* Speedtronic is used to make sure that you do not exceed a stored speed. You must select a low gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. switch off the engine. Z 117 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 118 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: Rvariable areas for speed limits, e.g. in built-up variable Speedtronic is selected You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Rpermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres (Y page 120) G Risk of accident Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. Variable Speedtronic* You can operate cruise control and variable Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected RLIM 118 Selecting variable Speedtronic X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is on. If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is selected. G Risk of accident 1 To store the current or higher speed, roun- ded up to the nearest ten 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To resume the last stored speed or to make fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments 4 To store the current or lower speed, rounded down to the nearest ten 5 To switch between cruise control and variable Speedtronic 6 Deactivating variable Speedtronic If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use Speedtronic when you do not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed higher than the stored limit speed allows. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable Speedtronic: Rusing the cruise control lever Rby depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. indicator lamp lit: * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 119 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. The current speed is stored. Speedtronic rounds up or down to the nearest ten. You will see the message "Limit" and the stored speed in the upper multi-function display for approximately five seconds. The yellow LIM indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. i On downhill gradients, the speed can be exceeded despite Speedtronic. In this case, you will hear a warning tone and the Limit exceeded message will appear in the multi-function display. If necessary, apply the brakes yourself. Calling up the last speed stored G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. Making adjustments in 10 km/hincrements X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/hincrements X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. or X Keep the cruise control lever pulled towards you 3 until the desired speed is set. Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are several ways to deactivate variable Speedtronic: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. or Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated. Cruise control is selected. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automatically when you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. X G Risk of accident It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Z 119 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 120 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Permanent Speedtronic* Parktronic* You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres) and the maximum speed. Just before the stored speed is reached, it appears in the multi-function display. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). G Risk of accident Setting permanent Speedtronic Press è or · to select the Settings menu (Y page 106). X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press j to select Speed limit (tyres). X X 120 Press the æ or ç button to select the desired setting. The following settings can be selected: ROff Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. RA limit speed between 230 km/h and 160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h X To select a different display, press the j, è or ÿ button. Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Parktronic is an electronic parking aid using ultrasound. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parktronic is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition and release the handbrake. Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Parktronic monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 121 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic to malfunction. Minimum distance 1 Example: sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side Top view Front sensors Range of the sensors Centre Approximately 100 cm The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush, otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 196). Corners Approximately 80 cm Rear sensors Centre Approximately 120 cm Corners Approximately 80 cm ! When parking, pay particular attention to Side view Centre Approximately 20 cm Corners Approximately 20 cm If there is an obstacle within this range, all warning displays light up and a tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum clearance, it may no longer be shown. Warning displays The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the roof lining in the rear compartment. objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. Z 121 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 122 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Manual transmission: Front area warning display 1 Left-hand side of the vehicle 2 Right-hand side of the vehicle 3 Indicator segments The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parktronic is operational if yellow indicator segments 3 light up. The gear lever or selector lever position* determines which warning display is active: Gear lever in Warning display Forwards gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear Rear and front areas activated AUTOTRONIC*: Selector lever at Warning display D Front area activated R orN Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated two seconds. You have reached the minimum distance. RRear area: from the sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone. At the seventh segment, you will hear a continuous warning tone for a maximum of two seconds. You have reached the minimum distance. The continuous warning tone is muted immediately if you shift out of reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or if you select D or P on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*. Deactivating/activating Parktronic One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance to the obstacle. RFront area: following the sixth segment, you will hear an intermittent warning tone, after the seventh segment, you will hear a continuous warning tone for a maximum of 1 Deactivating/activating Parktronic 2 Indicator lamp If indicator lamp 2 is on, Parktronic is deactivated. 122 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 123 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems i Parktronic is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Trailer towing* Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. ! Remove the detachable trailer coupling if it is no longer required. Parktronic measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Active parking assist* Active parking assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A suitable parking space is indicated by the parking symbol. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking. You may also use Parktronic (Y page 120). When Parktronic is deactivated, active parking assist is also unavailable. G Risk of accident Active parking assist is merely an aid and may sometimes recommend parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. These might be, for example, spaces where parking is prohibited, driveways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. Active parking assist measures the parking space as you drive past it. Any later changes to the parking space are not taken into account. This may be the case, for instance, when the vehicle parked in front of or behind the space changes its position or when an obstacle is moved into the parking space. Active parking assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. If you rely solely on Active parking assist, you could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. G Risk of accident Objects located above the height range of Active parking assist will not be detected * optional when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e. g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active parking assist may therefore guide you into the parking space too early. This may lead to a collision. For this reason, you should avoid using Active parking assist in such situations. G Risk of accident The front of the vehicle will veer out in the direction of the oncoming traffic during the parking operation. In some cases the vehicle will also take you onto sections of the oncoming lane during the parking procedure. You are responsible for safety at all times and must pay attention to any road users approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active parking assist parking procedure. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Z 123 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 124 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Use Active parking assist for parking spaces Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel. Rthat are on straight roads, not bends. Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example; Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. RParking spaces which are littered, overgrown or partially occupied by trailer towbars might not be identified properly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the Parktronic warning messages during the parking procedure (Y page 121). RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active parking assist will then be cancelled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle you should not use Active parking assist. RNever use active parking assist when snow chains or an emergency spare wheel* are fitted. 124 RMake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it as well as the condition of the location. In some cases, Active parking assist may guide you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases it may also lead you across or onto the kerb. If necessary, you should abort the parking procedure with Active parking assist. RYou can also engage forward gear prematurely. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space Should a gear be changed too early to achieve a sensible parking position, the parking procedure will be aborted. ! When unavoidable, you should drive over Detecting parking spaces Active parking assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below 35 km/h, you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. Active parking assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. If you wish to park in a space on the driver's side, the indicator on the driver's side must remain on. This must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active parking assist by pressing the j button on the multi-function steering wheel. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise you may damage the wheel rims or tyres. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 125 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Parking X G Risk of accident Example: Parking space detected 1 Detected parking space on the left 2 Parking symbol 3 Detected parking space on the right Active parking assist will only detect parking spaces: Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel. Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide. Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your vehicle. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approx. 15 m away from it. Parktronic and Active parking assist are merely parking aids and may not detect all obstacles. They do not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: move the selector lever to position R. On the multi-function display, the message: Park Assist Activate? Check vehicle surroundings Yes: No: appears X To cancel the procedure: press the k button on the multi-function steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using active parking assist: press the j button on the multi-function steering wheel. On the multi-function display, the message: Park Assist active Please accelerate and brake the vehicle yourself appears G Risk of accident When parking, you need to make sure that no obstacles are located in the vicinity of the vehicle during the entire operation. Active parking assist does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention. It merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. To stop the vehicle or avoid an accident you need to apply the brakes yourself. X X Let go of the multi-function steering wheel. Reverse the car, being ready to brake at all times. When reversing, do not exceed a speed of approx.10 km/h, otherwise active parking assist will be deactivated. Z * optional 125 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 126 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by reversing as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the Parktronic messages. Stop as soon as Parktronic sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Manoeuvring may be required in tight parking spaces. Vehicles with manual transmission: the message Park Assist active Please shift to a forward gear appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: the message Park Assist active Please shift to D appears in the multi-function display. X Vehicles with manual transmission: When the car is stationary, shift to first gear. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: When the car is stationary, set the selector lever to position R. Active parking assist immediately steers in the other direction. On the multi-function display, the message: Park Assist active Please acceler- ate and brake the vehicle yourself appears. i You will achieve the best parking results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before moving forwards. X 126 Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. X Stop as soon as Parktronic sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Vehicles with manual transmission: the message Park Assist active Please shift into reverse gear appears in the multifunction display. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*, the message Park Assist active Please shift to R appears in the multi-function display. X Further gear changes* may be necessary. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the message Parking assistance finished Please take over appears. Active parking assist is now deactivated. Parktronic is still available. X Manoeuvre if necessary. X Always observe the warning messages displayed by Parktronic (Y page 121). X Cancelling active parking assist You can cancel active parking assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multi-function steering wheel or steer yourself. Active parking assist will be cancelled at once. The multi-function display shows the message: Park Assist cancelled. or X Press the Parktronic button on the centre console (Y page 122). Parktronic is switched off and active parking assist is immediately cancelled. The multi-function display shows the message: Park Assist cancelled. Active parking assist is cancelled automatically if: Ra gear is changed* too early Rparking using active parking assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 10 km/h wheel spins, ESP® is activated or fails. In such cases the v warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Ra * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 127 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems A warning tone sounds. the multi-function display shows the message: Park Assist cancelled. When active parking assist is cancelled, you must steer again yourself. Trailer towing* For vehicles with a trailer coupling, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use active parking assist. Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, active parking assist is no longer available. Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area. ECO start/stop function* The ECO start/stop function automatically switches off the engine as soon as you stop the vehicle and restarts the engine as soon as you prepare to pull away again. Each time the engine is started using the key, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Conditions for the automatic engine switch-off The ECO start/stop function automatically switches off the engine if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe brake vacuum is stable Conditions for the automatic engine start The ECO start/stop function automatically switches on the engine if one of the following conditions is met: Rthe brake pedal is released Rthe clutch pedal is depressed Rthe vehicle speed exceeds a certain thresh- old Ryou have shifted to neutral Rthe ECO button is pressed Rthe clutch pedal is not depressed Rthe brake vacuum has decreased brake pedal is depressed Rthe battery charge has dropped vehicle speed is very low Rthe Rthe Rthe Rthe engine has reached its operating temperature demister function of Thermotronic* is selected Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe bonnet is closed Rthe outside temperature is within the comfort range Z * optional 127 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 128 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Driving systems Activating/deactivating the ECO start/ stop function If indicator lamp 2 is off, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. i The next time that the engine is started using the key, the ECO start/stop function is automatically reactivated. 1 To activate/deactivate the ECO start/ stop function 2 Indicator lamp 128 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 129 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Air conditioning Overview of air-conditioning systems The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems: Heatmatic16 Air-conditioning system* Thermotronic* Heatmatic is a heating and ventilation system The air conditioning combines a heating and The Thermotronic automatic air-conditioning without a cooling system. ventilation system with a cooling system. system combines an automatic heating and ventilation system with a cooling system. You can control the air conditioning separately for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Z 16 Only in certain countries. * optional 129 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 130 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning General notes The air-conditioning system*/ Thermotronic* controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. Heatmatic/the air-conditioning system*/ Thermotronic* is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is achieved only when you drive with the side windows and panorama louvred sliding sunroof* closed. 130 i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 86). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. G Risk of accident Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation, thereby causing an accident. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 131 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Overview of air-conditioning system functions Heatmatic Function 1 Sets the temperature Function 3 P Demists the windscreen 2 Sets the airflow Switches the air conditioning on/ off Ä Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode Function 5 Sets the air distribution P Demists the windscreen P Demists the windscreen 4 1 Switches the rear window heating on/off Z 131 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 132 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning i Notes and recommendations on optimum air conditioning: RActivate the air conditioning by turning control knob 3 clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). outside odours or when in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows could mist up due to a lack of fresh air in air-recirculation mode. ROnly use the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the "air-recirculation mode" briefly, e.g. when there are unpleasant Air-conditioning system* 132 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 133 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Function 1 Sets the temperature P Demists the windscreen 2 Ä Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode 3 Sets the airflow Switches the air conditioning on/ off P Demists the windscreen Function 4 1 Switches the rear window heating on/off 5 Sets the air distribution P Demists the windscreen 6 œ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off ROnly use the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the "air-recirculation mode" briefly, e.g. when there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows could mist up due to a lack of fresh air in air-recirculation mode. i Notes and recommendations on optimum air conditioning: RActivate the air conditioning by turning control knob 3 clockwise to the desired position (except position 0). RSet the temperature to 22 †. Z 133 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 134 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Thermotronic* Function Function Function 1 Q Sets the airflow 5 8 2 U Controls the air conditioning automatically ´ Switches the air conditioning on/off T Switches the residual heat function on/off 6 9 Sets the air distribution 3 | Demists the windscreen $ Increases the temperature, right $ Increases the temperature, left 1 Switches the rear window heating on/off a 4 7 œ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off b % Reduces the temperature, right 134 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 135 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Function c Display d % Reduces the temperature, left e Ä Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode Switching the air conditioning on/off i When the air conditioning is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly, otherwise the windows may mist up. i Activate the air conditioning primarily using the U button. i Notes and recommendations on optimum air conditioning: Heatmatic/air-conditioning system* RActivate Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: turn thumbwheel 3 clockwise to the desired position (apart from the 0 position) (Y page 131), (Y page 132). X To deactivate: turn thumbwheel 3 anticlockwise to position 0 (Y page 131), (Y page 132). the air conditioning using the U and œ buttons. The indicator lamps on the U and œ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 22 †. ROnly use the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. ROnly use the "air-recirculation mode" briefly, e.g. when there are unpleasant outside odours or when in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows could mist up due to a lack of fresh air in air-recirculation mode. X Thermotronic* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ´ button. The indicator lamp in the ´ button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. or X Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button comes on. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. X To deactivate: press the ´ button. The indicator lamp in the ´ button comes on. X RYou can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition. * optional Z 135 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 136 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off The "cooling with dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. This prevents the windows from misting up. G Risk of accident If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. H Environmental note The cooling system uses the refrigerant R134A. This refrigerant does not damage the earth's ozone layer. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode. The "cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available with air conditioning* or Thermotronic*. 17 Vehicles 136 To switch on: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button comes on. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X X Controlling the air conditioning automatically Only Thermotronic* features the "control air conditioning automatically" function. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic air conditioning will achieve optimal operation if "cooling with air dehumidification" is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. To deactivate: press the U button. The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. The airflow is regulated to the level set. The air distribution is set to the b position. Setting the temperature Heatmatic/air-conditioning system* You can set the temperature for the entire vehicle. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 131), (Y page 132). Only adjust the temperature in small increments. Start at 22 †.17 with air conditioning* * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 137 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning ice, snow and foliage, to guarantee the supply of fresh air into the vehicle interior. Thermotronic* Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The temperature is shown in the display. Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. i Position the sliders for the centre air vents in the central detent position for virtually draught-free ventilation. Setting the centre air vents Adjusting the air vents X G Risk of injury Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. Please observe the following notes to ensure that the air can flow freely through the air vents: Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of deposits, such as * optional Adjusting the side air vents To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 up or down. i Demister vent 1 is never shut com- pletely, even if side air vent 2 is shut. Setting the glove compartment air vent* 1 Centre air vent, left 2 Centre air vent, right 3 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right 4 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and 4 up or down. The glove compartment can be ventilated, for instance, to cool its contents, when the air conditioning*/Thermotronic* is activated. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. ! Close the glove compartment air vent when heating mode is activated. Open the air vent and activate "cooling with air dehu- 137 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 138 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning midification" if the outside temperature is high. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove compartment could be damaged. Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the air distribution Heatmatic/air-conditioning system* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn thumbwheel 5 to the corresponding symbol (Y page 131), (Y page 132). The thumbwheel can also be turned to the area between two symbols. X Thermotronic* 1 Rear-compartment air vent, left 2 Rear-compartment air vent, right 1 Air vent thumbwheel 2 Air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise. 138 3 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 to the left or right. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn thumbwheel 9 to the corresponding symbol (Y page 134). The thumbwheel can also be turned to the area between two symbols. X * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 139 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Setting the airflow Heatmatic/air-conditioning system* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel 3 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 131), (Y page 132). Demisting the windscreen i You should only select the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. X Thermotronic* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheel 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 134). X Heatmatic/air-conditioning system* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: switch on the cooling with air dehumidification.18 X Deactivate air-recirculation mode. X Turn thumbwheel 1 clockwise to P (Y page 131), (Y page 132). X Turn thumbwheel 3 clockwise to P (Y page 131), (Y page 132). X Turn thumbwheel 5 clockwise or anticlockwise to P (Y page 131), (Y page 132). X X To deactivate: turn thumbwheels 1, 3 and 5 to the desired position (apart from the P position) (Y page 131), (Y page 132). Thermotronic* Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the | button. The indicator lamp in the | button comes on. The system automatically switches to the following functions: X Rcooling airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation X mode off To switch off: press the | button. The indicator lamp in the | button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X 18 Only with air dehumidification on Rhigh Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the | button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. vehicles with an air-conditioning system* * optional 139 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 140 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning or X Press one of the $ or % temperature buttons. The indicator lamp in the | button goes out. The air distribution is directed towards the windscreen. The air conditioning switches to manual mode. or X Turn thumbwheel 1 clockwise or anticlockwise (Y page 134). The indicator lamp in the | button goes out. The air distribution is directed towards the windscreen. The air conditioning switches to manual mode. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside Activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function19. X Activate the automatic air conditioning.20 X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "demisting" function. X Switching the rear window heating on/off G Risk of accident Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise endanger you and others. i The rear window heating has a high cur- rent draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear, as it only switches off automatically after several minutes. Windows misted up on the outside X X Activate the windscreen wipers. Turn the air distribution thumbwheel to the Y or a symbol. i You should only select this setting until the windscreen is clear again. i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window heating may switch off. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate, press the 121/F22 button. The indicator lamp in the 1/F button lights up or goes out. X 19 Vehicles with air conditioning*/Thermotronic*. with Thermotronic*. 21 Vehicles with an air-conditioning system*/Thermotronic*. 22 Vehicles with Heatmatic. 20 Vehicles 140 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 141 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Air conditioning Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the Ä button. The indicator lamp in the Ä button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ä button. The indicator lamp in the Ä button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode switches off automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 7† Rafter approximately 5 minutes if cooling with air dehumidification23 is switched off Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 7† window moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the Ä button again. Press the button for stopping, opening or closing the side windows in the opposite direction as appropriate. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* is opened and closed. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the Ä button again. Press the button for stopping, opening or closing the panorama louvred sunroof* in the opposite direction as appropriate. X Convenience closing: press and hold the Ä button until the side windows and the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* have closed. The indicator lamp in the Ä button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. X Convenience opening: press and hold the Ä button until the side windows have returned to the original position. The indicator lamp in the Ä button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. The panorama louvred sliding sunroof* moves to the ventilation position. X i Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the Ä button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. 23 Vehicles Convenience opening/closing feature G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Do not place objects or lean against the side windows when they are being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the with air conditioning*/Thermotronic*. * optional 141 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 142 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Roof i If you open the side windows or the pan- orama louvred sliding sunroof* manually after closing with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Switching the residual heat on/off The "residual heat" function is only available with Thermotronic*. It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the "residual heat" function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it. X To activate: press the T button. The indicator lamp in the T button lights up. X 142 X To deactivate: press the T button. The indicator lamp in the T button goes out. i The residual heat automatically switches off after around 30 minutes or if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe battery voltage drops Roof Panorama roof* G Risk of injury The glass in the panorama sunroof* could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. Panorama louvred sliding sunroof* G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the panorama louvred sliding sunroof. If danger threatens, release the switch and press the switch again to reopen the panorama louvred sliding sunroof. G Risk of injury Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always remove the key from the ignition lock, even if you are leaving the vehicle only briefly. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 143 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Roof ! Only open the panorama louvred sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the panorama louvred sliding sunroof. The seals could otherwise be damaged. i You can also set the panorama louvred sliding sunroof to the ventilation position from the outside by using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 86). The switch is in the overhead control panel. Ventilation position Opening and closing the cover* To ventilate the vehicle, you can lift the rear edge of the first pane on the panorama louvred sliding sunroof. X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold. The panorama louvred sliding sunroof stops in the ventilation position. Opening Press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold. The panorama louvred sliding sunroof stops in the ventilation position. X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 again and hold until the desired position has been reached. X Cover 1 for the panorama louvred sliding sunroof and the panorama roof shields the vehicle interior from sunlight. It is possible to open and close the cover by hand regardless of the position of the panorama louvred sliding sunroof. Closing X 1 To open 2 To close X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold until the desired position has been reached or the panorama louvred sliding sunroof is closed. Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. * optional Z 143 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 144 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Loading and stowing Cup holder in the centre console X Cup holder The stowage compartments in the doors contain mouldings designed to hold bottles. holder is closed. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rare direction suddenly involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. Roof rack system* and ski rack* G Risk of accident 1 Cup holder Cup holder in the rear compartment* 1 Cup holder 144 To open: fold down the rear seat armrest. Press the front of cup holder 1. The cup holder slides out automatically. ! Do not fold the armrest up unless the cup G Risk of injury Rchange X An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or load could work loose from the vehicle and thereby cause an accident. Follow the roof rack/ski rack manufacturers' installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must observe the maximum roof load of 50 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof rack systems which have been tested and approved for Mercedes* optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 145 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, make sure that you can: Ropen the panorama louvred sliding sunroof* fully Ropen the tailgate fully Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Luggage net G Risk of injury Only place lightweight items in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky, sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event of an accident, the luggage net will not secure the transported goods. G Risk of poisoning Keep the tailgate closed when the engine is running. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by exhaust fumes entering the vehicle. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle depend on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should therefore load your vehicle as shown in the illustrations. Loading guidelines G Risk of injury 1 Covers Fold covers 1 upwards. X Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1. X Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. This also applies to seats which have been removed. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. Observe the following notes when transporting a load: RWhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). RPosition heavy loads as far forwards and as low down in the luggage compartment as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the backrests. Z 145 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 146 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing RAlways place the load against the rear seat compartment floor will be increased when the load is lashed down. backrests or the seat cushions if these have been folded forwards. RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage Securing a load well under the luggage compartment floor is 25 kg. Lashing eyelets RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp edges for protection. i Load restraints are available at any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. RIf the rear seats are not occupied, insert the belt tongue on the outer seat belts into the buckle of the opposite seat belt. This increases the restraining effect of the rear seat backrests. ! Do not position the load on one part of the folding luggage compartment floor only. The maximum load capacity of the folding luggage compartment floor is 100 kg. Spread the weight evenly to avoid damaging the luggage compartment floor. If necessary, place a solid board under the load. Please note that the load on the luggage 146 G Risk of injury Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets evenly. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly Rare involved in an accident Please observe the loading guidelines. Observe the following points or guidelines when securing loads: RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 147 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Securing loads in the luggage compartment There are four lashing eyelets in the luggage compartment. Securing a load when the seats have been removed RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the door trim. RLong loads must only be placed low down and towards the front of the frontpassenger footwell. ! Load restraints must not be fastened to Rear seat removed Guide the load restraints in a cross pattern over the load, as shown in the illustration. X Secure the load using the lashing eyelets or the mounting cups on the seats. X Example: 5-door vehicle 1 Lashing eyelets X Secure the load using lashing eyelets 1 or the mounting cups for the seats, if the seats have been removed. G Risk of injury Always stow the load so that it does not interfere with driving the vehicle. Avoid obstructing the driver's line-of-sight. The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the door trim if the front-passenger seat has been removed. Pad sharp edges for protection. This will reduce the risk of lacerations and prevent the load restraints from wearing. Observe the following notes: the front right-hand mounting cup. Otherwise, the contact switch for the frontpassenger seat could be damaged. Securing a light load using a retaining net* X Place the retaining net over the load. X Engage the retaining net hooks in the lashing eyelets. Through-loading feature* G Risk of injury Do not transport unsecured objects in the through-loading facility. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. Z * optional 147 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 148 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Removing the armrest To enable you to use the maximum throughloading opening and to prevent the armrest from becoming dirty or being damaged, the armrest should be removed (Y page 148). Opening the through-loading facility 2 Cover in the luggage compartment 3 Locking mechanism Slide locking mechanism 3 in the direction of the arrow. X Swing cover 2 to the side. Cover 2 is held open by a magnet. X 1 Armrest X Fold down armrest 1. 1 Armrest X Fold down armrest 1. Closing the through-loading facility Swing back cover 2 in the luggage compartment until it engages. X Fold the armrest up fully if necessary. X 2 Release 148 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 149 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Pull release 2 upwards and hold it securely. X Pull armrest 1 out towards the front. Hold the side of armrest 1 as you do this, otherwise you could inadvertently open the cup holder. X i The release remains in the open position after armrest 1 has been removed. ! Do not press the release down when the armrest has been removed, otherwise the armrest mechanism could be damaged. Fitting the armrest X X Align the armrest. Slide the armrest back until it engages. The release drops down. Make sure that the red area 1 of the release is no longer visible. If it is still visible, the armrest is not locked in position. G Risk of injury The armrests must be locked in position when the vehicle is being driven. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the armrest being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. Nobody should travel in the vehicle sitting in the centre position in the rear compartment if the armrest has been removed. EASY-VARIO system* On 3-door vehicle variants, the "Variable luggage compartment floor" (Y page 155) and "Removing the rear seat cushion" (Y page 151) functions are combined in the EASY-VARIO system. EASY-VARIO-PLUS system* On 5-door vehicle variants, the "Removing the rear seat cushion" (Y page 151), "Removing the backrest" (Y page 152), "Removable front-passenger seat" (Y page 156) and "Folding backrest on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 158) functions are combined in the EASY-VARIO-PLUS system. ! Do not close the armrest unless it has been locked in position, otherwise the armrest mechanism could be damaged. 1 Red area Z * optional 149 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 150 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Enlarging the luggage compartment Folding the rear bench seat forwards The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can be folded down to increase the luggage compartment capacity. G Risk of injury Pull seat cushion release handle 1. The seat cushion is unlocked. X Fold the right-hand or left-hand seat cushion forward. X 5-door vehicles Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you fold the backrests forward. ! To prevent damage, before the backrests are folded forward: Rthe head restraints must be pushed in fully 1 Belt retainer Rthe X front seats must be as far forwards as possible Rthe seat cushions must be folded forward Insert the seat belt into belt retainer 1. 3-door vehicles 1 Seat cushion or removed X 1 Seat cushion release handle 150 Fold left or right seat cushion 1 forwards. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 151 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing 3 and 5-door vehicles Swinging back the rear bench seat G Risk of injury Make sure that the backrest is correctly locked in position. The red lock verification indicators on the left and right sides should no longer be visible. If they are visible, the backrests are not locked in position. Occupants could then be injured in the event of an accident, e.g. by objects being thrown forwards from the luggage compartment. 2 Backrest release handle 3 Backrest Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle 2 on backrest. Corresponding backrest 3 is unlocked. X Fold the backrest forwards until it rests on the hinge fixtures (Y page 152). X Move the front seats to the desired positions. 4 Red lock verification indicator X X Removing rear seat cushions* Swing the backrest back until it engages. Red lock verification indicator 4 is no longer visible. ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped. Swing the seat cushion backwards. Adjust the head restraints if necessary . X Move the front seats to the desired positions. If red lock verification indicator 4 is visible, this means the backrest is not engaged. X X 1 Belt retainer X Insert the seat belt into belt retainer 1. Z 151 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 152 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Grasp release handle 2 and pull seat cushion 3 upwards. X Remove seat cushion 3. X ! Vehicles with emergency spare wheel*, loud speaker system* or sound system*: You cannot stow any seat cushions under the variable luggage compartment floor*. Fitting rear seat cushions* Fold hinge 4 upwards if necessary. Only then can the seat cushion be slid in. X Slide the seat cushion onto the fixtures until it engages. X 1 Seat cushion X i For easier alignment of the cushions, Fold left or right seat cushion 1 forwards. 4 Hinge X If the backrest is to be removed: fold down hinge 4. If the backrest is only to be folded down: leave hinge 4 as a support for the backrest in the position shown above. i Vehicles with TIREFIT kit: 2 Release handle 3 Seat cushion 152 You can stow the seat cushions under the variable luggage compartment floor*. Vehicles with emergency spare wheel: You can stow a seat cushion under the variable luggage compartment floor*. observe the arrows on the rear of the seat cushions. X Swing the seat cushion back. Removing the backrests* X Fold the seat cushion forwards (Y page 151). Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 153 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing X Press seat belt buckle 1 on the grooved surface and remove seat belt buckle 1 from holder 3. i When the ignition is switched on an indi- 1 Connector 2 Connector holder 3 Lever Warning symbol on the connector of the rear seat belt status indicator cator is shows the status of the corresponding rear seats in the upper multifunction display. If, for example, neither seat belt buckle are is engaged, the message: < No rear seat belt engaged appears. Stow seat belt buckle 1 on seat belt buckle holder 2 on the vehicle floor. X Pull holder 3 upwards and hold it securely. X 4 Backrest release handle 5 Backrest Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle 4 on backrest 5. Corresponding backrest 5 is unlocked. X Fold backrest 5 forwards past the vertical to an angle of approximately 20°. X Hold backrest 5 with your free hand and lift the backrest by pulling lever 3. X i For greater convenience, there is a recess on the rear of the 2/3 backrest which makes it easier to grasp the backrest. X Remove backrest 5 from the vehicle through the rear door. Fitting the backrest* 1 Recesses Z 153 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 154 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing X Place the backrest, starting with the front seat feet, onto the locking bolts in recesses 1. Fit the seat cushions as required. Swing the seat cushion backwards. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary . If red lock verification indicator 2 is visible, this means the backrest is not engaged. X X G Risk of injury 2 Red lock verification indicator Swing the backrest back until it engages. Red lock verification indicator 2 is no longer visible. X Make sure that the lever is lying flat on the vehicle floor. X Take the connector out of the recesses on the vehicle floor. X Insert the connector back into the lever until you hear it engage. X i Make sure that you insert the connector correctly into the lever, as the rear seat belt status will otherwise no longer be displayed in the instrument cluster. 154 Make sure that the backrest is correctly locked in position. The red lock verification indicators on the left and right sides should no longer be visible. If they are visible, the backrests are not locked in position. Occupants could then be injured in the event of an accident, e.g. by objects being thrown forwards from the luggage compartment. X Fold back the seat cushion. Stowage well under the luggage compartment floor The maximum load capacity of the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor is 25 kg. G Risk of injury You should always close the luggage compartment floor if you are transporting objects in the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. Removing/fitting the luggage compartment floor (3-door vehicles without variable luggage compartment floor) You can remove the luggage compartment floor to enable you to load and unload the stowage well more easily. X To remove: raise the luggage compartment floor to an angle of approximately 45°. X Remove the luggage compartment floor. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 155 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing To fit: insert the luggage compartment floor into the guide rail at an angle of approximately 45°. X Fold the luggage compartment floor down. X sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. Adjusting the height of the luggage compartment floor* Opening/closing the luggage compartment floor (vehicles with variable luggage compartment floor) Opening the luggage compartment floor 3 Bag hook Press bag hook 3 (Y page 158). Bag hook 3 slides out. X Place luggage compartment floor 2 onto bag hook 3. X 1 Handle 2 Luggage compartment floor X Pull handle 1 until it is vertical and then swing luggage compartment floor 2 upwards. The stowage well under the luggage compartment floor can be increased or decreased in size as necessary. To do this, you can lock the floor at two different heights. The upper catch gives a flat load surface when the rear bench seat is folded forward. Raising the luggage compartment floor Closing the luggage compartment floor X Press in bag hook 3 until it engages. X Swing the luggage compartment floor downwards. G Risk of injury The luggage compartment floor must be locked correctly when items are carried in it. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of 1 Handle 2 Luggage compartment floor 3 To raise Z 155 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 156 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Raise luggage compartment floor 2 using handle 1 in the direction of the arrow 3 and tug it upwards sharply. X Lower luggage compartment floor 2 again. To do this, push the luggage compartment floor away so that it engages in the guide on the upper level. Luggage compartment floor 2 engages in the higher position. X Lowering the luggage compartment floor X Raise luggage compartment floor 2 slightly using handle 1 and tug it briefly towards you. X Lower luggage compartment floor 2 again slowly. To do this, press the luggage compartment floor into the lower level. Luggage compartment floor 2 engages in the lower position. Removing/fitting the removable front-passenger seat* Removing the front-passenger seat ! To avoid damage, the head restraint must be pushed in fully before the frontpassenger seat is removed. Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Disconnect connector 1. A signal sounds. The lock for lever 2 is released. If the engine is running, the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp flashes and the 1 warning lamp lights up after a short time. X Move the front-passenger seat to its centre position. It is only possible to remove the seat without tilting it when it is in this position X Store connector 1 under the seat in such a way that the cable does not get caught on the seat frame. X 1 Connector 2 Lever ! Do not operate the lever until you have pulled out the connector. The use of force when opening will cause damage to mechanical and electronic components. 156 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 157 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Open cable box 3 and place connector 1 inside. X Close cable box 3. X G Risk of injury The front-passenger seat which has been removed contains an active sidebag. Do not attach a power source to the connector on the seat, otherwise the airbag could inflate. Store the seat out of the reach of children. Fitting the front-passenger seat 1 Connector 2 Lever 3 Cable box Swing lever 2 forwards and pull upwards. The seat slides out of the front mounting cups. X Take hold of the seat at the back of the backrest and at the front edge of the seat cushion. X Guide the seat through the front-passenger door opening. X G Risk of injury The mounting cups must be free from dirt and other items in order for the frontpassenger seat to engage securely. You must connect up the connector, so that the front-passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. If it is not connected and the engine is running, the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp flashes and the 1 warning lamp lights up after a short time. 1 Rear mounting cups 2 Front mounting cups 3 Connector 4 Cable box 5 Lever 6 Seat frame Take connector 3 out of cable box 4 and place it at the front. X Take hold of the seat at the back of the backrest and at the front edge of the seat cushion. X 157 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 158 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Guide the seat through the front-passenger door opening. X Move the seat into position over the mounting cups. X Insert the seat hook into rear mounting cups 1. X Push the front of the seat down until it engages. Lever 5 springs back to its starting position. Only then is the seat correctly locked in position. X Route connector 3 over seat frame 6. X Insert connector 3 into the coupling on the seat. X G Risk of injury Before starting off, make sure that the seat has engaged properly. Folding backrest on the frontpassenger seat* Folding the front-passenger seat backrest forward Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest Push the backrest down slightly and pull release handle 1. X Swing the backrest back until it engages. X Bag hook There is a bag hook in the luggage compartment on the left-hand side. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. 1 Release handle X X Push the backrest back slightly. Pull the release handle 1 and swing the backrest fully onto the seat cushion until it engages. 1 Bag hook X 158 To open: press bag hook 1 (arrow). Bag hook 1 slides out. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 159 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing X To close: press bag hook 1 until it engages. Rolling up the luggage compartment cover X Luggage compartment cover* Unclip luggage compartment cover 1 and guide it forwards. i You can fold up the part of the luggage compartment cover which remains visible. Removing the luggage compartment cover Make sure that luggage compartment cover 1 is rolled up. X Press the handle on the right underside in the direction of the arrow 2. X Remove luggage compartment cover 1. X Fitting the luggage compartment cover Align luggage compartment cover 1 in the hole on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. X Press the handle in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Allow luggage compartment cover 1 to engage in the appropriate recess. X 1 Luggage compartment cover Stowage compartments Pulling out the luggage compartment cover X Pull luggage compartment cover 1 back and clip it into the retainers on the left and right-hand sides. G Risk of injury 1 Luggage compartment cover 2 To release The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Z * optional 159 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 160 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing Rbrake sharply Rchange Rare direction suddenly involved in an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be placed in the luggage net. Glove compartment i In the glove compartment there are stowage spaces for the following: Rcoins Rpens Rcredit cards and service cards i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you will find installed in the glove compartment either a CD holder*, an AUX-IN connection* or a Media Interface*, which is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod or USB device. i Glove compartment ventilation*: the glove compartment is ventilated by an adjustable vent (Y page 137). 1 Handle i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there is a CD changer* in the glove compartment. To open: pull handle 1 and open the glove compartment lid. X To close: push the glove compartment lid up firmly until it engages. 1 Cover X To open: slide cover 1 forwards. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment* in front of the armrest Stowage compartment in the front centre console If your vehicle is not equipped with the smoker's package*, a 12 V power socket is fitted in place of the ashtray. X 160 1 Stowage compartment * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 161 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Loading and stowing X To open: briefly press the cover of stowage compartment 1. Stowage compartment 1 opens. X Stowage compartment in the rear compartment i Several CD jewel cases 2 can be stacked in the stowage box. There is a catch 1 fitted to stop the CD cases moving around. Stowage boxes* under the driver's seat and front-passenger seat The stowage boxes can store up to 2.5 kg. To open: raise the stowage box slightly and pull it out using handle 3. Stowage compartment under the armrest* 1 Stowage compartment X The illustration shows the driver's seat 1 Stop for CD jewel case 2 CD jewel case 3 Recess 1 Stowage compartment G Risk of injury There is the risk of entrapment when sliding the armrest forwards or backwards. X To open: slide the armrest forwards. To open: pull out the top of stowage compartment 1 by the edge of the handle. Stowage compartments in the luggage compartment G Risk of injury The stowage boxes can store up to 1.5 kg. The objects in the left-hand stowage compartment should only be placed in the designated spaces and secured using the appropriate holders. Otherwise, the stowage compartment could open and you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by 161 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 162 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Features objects being thrown around the vehicle interior in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. The stowage compartments are located in the luggage compartment on the left and righthand sides. Features Mirror in the sun visor Sun visors Mirror light* 1 only comes on if the sun visor is clipped into retainer 2 and mirror cover 5 has been folded up. G Risk of accident Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. Otherwise, you could be dazzled, impairing your view of traffic conditions. As a result, you could cause an accident. Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor from retainer 2. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Ashtray* Ashtray in the cockpit 1 Handle i The left-hand stowage compartment con- tains the first-aid kit, the vehicle tool kit, the jack, the warning triangle and TIREFIT. To open: turn handle 1 away from the direction of travel. X Fold down the flap. X 162 1 Mirror light* 2 Retainer 3 Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket 4 Vanity mirror 5 Mirror cover 1 Cover 2 Ashtray * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 163 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Features To open: slide cover 1 forwards. Ashtray 2 opens. X To remove the insert: pull the insert up and out. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. X Ashtray in the rear compartment Cigarette lighter* G Risk of injury and fire Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Slide cover 1 forwards. X Press in cigarette lighter 2. Cigarette lighter 2 will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X 12 V socket The socket can be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. Socket in the cockpit A socket is fitted in the centre console on vehicles with the non-smoker's package. 1 Ashtray To open: pull ashtray 1 out by its top edge. X To remove the insert: pull the insert up and out beyond the stop. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. X * optional 1 Cover 2 Cigarette lighter 1 Socket Z 163 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 164 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Features X Lift up the cover of socket 1. Socket in the luggage compartment* The socket is located in the left-hand stowage compartment in the luggage compartment. 1 Socket Open the stowage compartment (Y page 161). X Lift up the cover of socket 1. X Mobile phone* G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you may only do so when the traffic situation allows. Otherwise, you could be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and, thereby, jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you may only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions 164 relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. To ensure optimum reception quality for mobile phones in the vehicle, and to minimise mutual influences between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases, these are country-specific. You can obtain these mobile phone brackets from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. Inserting the mobile phone Open the telephone compartment (Y page 160). X Place the mobile phone bracket into the pre-installed fitting; see the separate X * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 165 Version: 2.10.6 Controls Features mobile phone bracket installation instructions. X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket; see the separate mobile phone bracket installation instructions. If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile phone bracket, you can speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. You can operate the telephone using the s and t buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. You can operate other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 113). When you take the key out of the ignition lock, the mobile phone stays on but you can no longer use the hands-free system. If you are making a call and you would like to take the key out of the ignition lock, first remove the mobile phone from the bracket. Otherwise, the call will be terminated. Floormat on the driver's side G Risk of accident Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be secured at all times using retainers and studs. Before you drive off, make sure that the floormats are secure and rectify if necessary. A floormat which is not properly secured can slip and thereby interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. 1 Press-studs 2 Retainers Slide seat backwards. To fit: place the floormat in position. X Press stud 1 onto retainer 2. X X X X To remove: pull floormat off retainers 2. Remove the floormat. Z 165 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 166 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 166 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 167 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Running-in notes ............................... Refuelling ........................................... Engine compartment ........................ Tyres and wheels .............................. Winter driving ................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving abroad ................................... 168 168 171 176 181 183 185 Trailer towing* .................................. 186 Service ............................................... 191 Care .................................................... 192 167 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 168 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Refuelling Running-in notes Refuelling The first 1,500 km Refuelling If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, you will be rewarded with excellent performance for the remainder of the engine's life. RYou should therefore drive at varying road and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. RChange gear in good time. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). ROnly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. 168 G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, always turn off the engine. G Risk of injury Avoid any contact with fuels. You can damage your health if your skin comes into direct contact with fuel or if you inhale fuel vapours. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This causes damage to the fuel system and engine and could result in the vehicle catching fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel will cause damage to the injection system. Damage result- ing from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. ! Do not start the engine if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel could enter the fuel lines. This would require draining of the fuel tank and fuel lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. When you open or close the vehicle with the key, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked. The position of the fuel filler cap is to the rear on the right. The fuel tank filler flap is shown in the instrument cluster 4. The arrow on Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 169 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Refuelling the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. X Close the fuel filler flap. X i Vehicles with a diesel engine: if the fuel tank has been run completely dry, it will be necessary to bleed the fuel system (Y page 232). Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. For further information on "Fuel" see (Y page 292). Turbo engines Petrol (EN 228) 1 To open the fuel filler flap 2 To insert the fuel cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 Fuel type To open: press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow 1. X Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap 2. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. X ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade petrol with a minimum octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i As a temporary measure, only when the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the available petrol quality may not be adequate and could cause coking around the inlet valve. In such cases, and in consultation with a ! Refuel using only unleaded Super Plus with a minimum octane number of 98 RON/88 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. You must avoid driving at full throttle. Z 169 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 170 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Refuelling Diesel (EN 590) ! Only use diesel that complies with the EN 590 European standard. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about diesel under "Fuel" in the index. ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par- ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight should be used. In countries in which diesel with a higher sulphur content is available (e.g. 0.035 percent by weight), the engine oil should be renewed at more frequent intervals. More information about intervals for changing the engine oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Using fuel that does not comply with EN 590 can increase wear and damage the engine and the exhaust system. Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel Rheating oil Rbio-diesel 170 Rvegetable oil Rpetrol Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do not use any special additives (exception: flow improvers – see "Low outside temperatures"). Damage caused by the use of unapproved fuels or additives is not covered by the warranty. For further information on "Fuel" see (Y page 292). Low outside temperatures The flow properties of diesel may be inadequate at low ambient temperatures. To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. Your vehicle must be refuelled with this winter diesel at temperatures of -5 °C or below. You can use this winter diesel at temperatures down to about -20 °C without problems. If only summer diesel fuel or less cold-resistant winter diesel fuel (e.g. in Mediterranean regions) is available, you should add an amount of flow improver to the fuel corresponding to the outside temperature. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become inadequate. Otherwise, malfunctions can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This would damage the fuel system and engine and could result in a vehicle fire. Flow improver The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 171 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Engine compartment Engine compartment Bonnet G Risk of accident Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. The bonnet may otherwise open and block your view. Opening G Risk of injury There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Operating Instructions and observe the relevant safety notes. G Risk of injury The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason you must not reach into the turning area of the fan. You can otherwise be injured. Vehicles with a petrol engine: The electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason, you must never touch components of the ignition system (ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug connector or test socket) when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off and that the key has been pulled out of the ignition lock before opening the bonnet. The bonnet release lever is located in the driver's footwell. Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand Vehicles with a diesel engine: The electronic injection control uses high voltage. Therefore, never touch fuel injection system components when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G Risk of injury The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper rods. 1 Bonnet release lever X Pull bonnet release lever 1. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded out from the windscreen. You could otherwise damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Z 171 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 172 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Engine compartment The handle for opening the bonnet is located above the radiator grille. Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. X i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Engine oil 3 Recess 4 Support strut 2 Bonnet catch handle X Pull handle 2 of the bonnet catch outwards from the radiator grille and lift the bonnet from underneath by the radiator grille. 5 Bracket X X Pull support strut 4 out of bracket 5. Swing support strut 4 upwards and insert it into yellow recess 3. Closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Raise the bonnet slightly and remove support strut 4 from yellow recess 3. X Swing support strut 4 down and press it into bracket 5 until it engages. X 172 Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. You can only estimate the oil consumption after you have driven a considerable distance. For further information on engine oil see (Y page 296). Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 173 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Engine compartment Checking the engine oil level Eng. oil level Reduce oil level X Have excess oil siphoned off. To do so: Rthe vehicle should be parked on level ground ! There is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter if there is excess oil in the engine. Rthe engine should be switched off for at least five minutes if the engine was at normal operating temperature. Rthe engine should be switched off for at least 30 minutes if the engine was not at operating temperature (i.e. if you only started the engine briefly) Using the on-board computer* i Only possible on vehicles with a diesel engine. A dipstick is used to check petrol engines (Y page 174). Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X Press the j or k button to select the following message: X The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the display: REngine oil level OK RAdd 1.0 litre to reach maximum oil level RAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum oil level RAdd 2.0 litres to reach maximum oil level X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 174). Other messages in the multi-function display If the engine is at normal operating temperature and there is too much oil, you will see the following message: * optional If the Switch ignition on to check engine oil level message appears: X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. You will see the following message if you did not observe the required waiting period: Observe waiting period X Repeat the measurement after about five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. X Repeat the measurement after about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature (if the engine was only started briefly). The following message appears if the engine is running: Engine oil level Not when engine on X Switch off the engine and wait for five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temper- 173 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 174 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Engine compartment Topping up the engine oil ature (if the engine was only started briefly), before measuring. i If you wish to cancel the measurement, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel. Using the oil dipstick Example: vehicles with a turbo/diesel engine 1 Oil dipstick 2 Maximum mark 3 Minimum mark Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick 1. X Insert oil dipstick 1 into the oil dipstick tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between minimum mark 3 and maximum mark 2. X Top up the oil if necessary. X Example: vehicles with a petrol engine 1 Oil dipstick 2 Maximum mark 3 Minimum mark Example: vehicles with a petrol/diesel engine 1 Cap X X i The difference in quantity between the minimum mark and the maximum mark is approximately 1.2 litres. On the A 160 CDI it is approximately 1.5 litres. ! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil is added (oil level is above the maximum mark on the dipstick) the engine or catalytic converter could be damaged. Have excess oil siphoned off. X 174 Unscrew cap 1 and remove it. Top up with the required amount of oil (Y page 296). Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 175 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Engine compartment H Environmental note Checking the coolant level X When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be damaging the environment. The coolant expansion tank is located in the engine compartment on the right when viewed in the direction of travel. X For further information on engine oil (Y page 296). Windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system* Coolant The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. The headlamp cleaning system is also supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. G Risk of injury The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70 °C. You could otherwise be scalded by escaping hot coolant. Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. * optional Top up the coolant if necessary. Replace cap 1 and tighten all the way to the stop. For further information on coolant see (Y page 297) . 1 Cap 2 Coolant expansion tank 3 Marker bar Slowly turn cap 1 half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and remove it. There is sufficient coolant in expansion tank 2 if the coolant is level with marker bar 3 in the filler neck when cold or approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. X 1 Cap X Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. 175 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 176 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Tyres and wheels G Risk of fire Tyres and wheels Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling washer fluid concentrate. Points to remember At temperatures above freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 175). X At temperatures below freezing: fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water, antifreeze additive and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 175). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. X X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. ! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. X To close: press cap 1 onto the filler neck until it clicks into place. X 176 ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (with run-flat characteristics)* *Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres should only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by MercedesBenz. If you use other tyres and wheels, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage that may result from this. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you use tyres other than those tested and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, characteristics such as handling, vehicle noise emissions and fuel consumption may be adversely affected. In addition, the wheels may come into contact with the body or axle components when heavily loaded or when driving with snow chains. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. G Risk of accident If wheels or tyres other than those which have been tested are fitted: Rthe brakes or chassis components could be damaged. Rwheel and tyre clearances can no longer be guaranteed. This could cause an accident. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva- * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 177 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Tyres and wheels lidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if tyres of the same size are required on the front and rear wheels. RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel*. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). ! Store tyres that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. * optional Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 178). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. RRegularly check the pressure of all your tyres including the spare tyre*, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 178). Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres examined at a specialist workshop, for example at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, could get damaged. Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. i You may fit a spare tyre* against the direction of rotation. Z 177 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 178 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Tyres and wheels MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system allows you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning system and only on wheels specifically tested and approved by MercedesBenz. i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat sys- tem are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*24. Therefore, it is recommended that you equip your vehicle additionally with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 262). 24 Only 178 Tyre tread G Risk of accident Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. Thus, you should replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less as they will no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the steering wheel so that you can see the tyre tread more easily. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Tyre pressures i You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. The valid value for the spare wheel* is stated on the spare wheel and in the technical data section. G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. Therefore, you should regularly check the pressure of all your tyres (including the spare tyre*), particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. G Risk of accident Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 179 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Tyres and wheels RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which could lead to your causing an accident. Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient temperature. If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosed spaces where the temperature differs from the outside temperature, you will have to correct the measured value accordingly. When the vehicle is driven, the tyre temperature, and with it the tyre pressure, will increase depending on the road speed and the load on the tyres. Therefore, you should only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The pressure of warm tyres should only be corrected if it is too low for the current operating conditions. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rincrease the likelihood of tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) i The tyre pressure values given for low loads are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. However, you can also use the values given for higher loads. These are permissible and will not adversely affect the running of the vehicle. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. Tyre pressure loss warning system While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multi-function display. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure loss warning system is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking care- 179 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 180 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Tyres and wheels fully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres. Rroad Ryou conditions are wintry. are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted X the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four 180 tyres is set correctly for the operating conditions concerned. X Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 178). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in vehicle instability when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. Make sure that the key is in position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. You will see the following message on the standard screen of the multi-function display (Y page 100) X Press k or j to select the tyre pressure function: Run Flat Indicator active Menu: R-Button X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster. The following message appears in the multi-function display: X Restart Run Flat Indicat.? Yes Cancel If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the æ button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Run Flat Indicator restarted After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the ç button. or X Wait until the message Restart Run Flat Indicator? Yes Cancel disappears. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 181 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Winter driving Interchanging the wheels G Risk of accident Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions: for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ, depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. Interchange the wheels every 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear, provided that the vehicle has the same size front and rear tyres. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is changed. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system. Winter driving Points to remember Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the onset of winter. Winter tyres Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 °C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only then can the effect of the ABS and ESP® driving systems be ensured in winter too. Use winter tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G Risk of accident Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are no longer suitable for winter use and can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permitted speed specified for the winter tyres you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a lower maximum permitted speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign 181 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 182 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Winter driving in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Under these circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent Speedtronic*25 to the maximum permissible speed for the winter tyres (Y page 120). Once you have fitted the winter tyres: X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 178). G Risk of accident If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired owing to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel* replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains which have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. You may only fit snow chains as a pullingaway aid. Only use fine-link snow chains. When snow chains are fitted, you may only drive straight ahead. The snow chains could otherwise come into contact with the bodywork when you turn the front wheels. When snow chains are fitted, you cannot use Active Park Assist* (Y page 123). Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. ! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tyres is applicable for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only permissible with these tyres. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ tyre combinations. Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. on a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. RFit snow chains only in pairs and only to the front wheels. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Winter driving G Risk of accident Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: ! Vehicles with 17" tyres 25 Only 182 available for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 183 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Driving tips Vehicles with manual transmission: engage neutral. X Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: shift the selector lever to N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control using corrective steering. X Driving tips Downhill gradients Rolling with the engine switched off On long and steep downhill stretches, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. G Risk of accident Never switch the engine off while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine is not running. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake and, therefore, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. cruise control* or Speedtronic*. Braking This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Heavy and light loads Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. * optional i This also applies if you have activated If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases 183 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 184 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Driving tips the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet roads If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes, when braking for the first time. You must brake harder. You must therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. This way the brake discs will become warm, drying more quickly, which will protect them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salted roads G Risk of accident The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a signifi- 184 cantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake disc. New brake pads/linings For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Tyre grip G Risk of accident Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. Otherwise, you could cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a light film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 185 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Driving abroad Driving on wet roads If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is 25 cm. Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace. ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. You must observe these notes. Otherwise, damage may occur to the engine, electrics and transmission. * optional Driving abroad ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use genuine Mercedes-Benz masking tape. Your headlamps could otherwise be damaged. Remove the masking tape when you are once again driving on the same side of the road as in the country in which your vehicle is registered. Points to remember An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. The Service Hotline's current telephone numbers for use when you are abroad are to be found in the "Service24h" chapter of the Service Booklet. Only low-octane fuel is available in certain countries. You can find further information about fuel grades on (Y page 168). Symmetrical dipped beam If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on sides of the road opposite to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam or be partially masked. Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less. X Vehicles with halogen headlamps: mask the headlamps with special masking tape. X Vehicles with projection and bi-xenon headlamps*: have the headlamps switched over at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Have your headlamps switched back to asymmetrical dipped beam if you are driving in a country in which traffic drives on the same side of the road as in the country in which your vehicle was registered. Otherwise, you may dazzle the oncoming traffic and could cause an accident. i You can obtain this masking tape from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 185 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 186 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Trailer towing* Trailer towing* Fitting the ball coupling X Make a note of the ball coupling key number. i You can use this number to obtain a replacement key from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury If the ball coupling does not engage properly when it is attached, the vehicle/trailer combination is not secured and could become detached. You could therefore cause an accident. Attach the ball coupling carefully and make sure that it engages. Vehicles without ECO start/stop function: the attachable ball coupling is on the right of the stowage compartment in the luggage compartment (Y page 161). X Open the stowage compartment on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment. X Fold the trim downwards. Vehicles without ECO start/stop function 1 Ball coupling Vehicles with ECO start/stop function 1 Ball coupling 2 Retainer strap 2 Ball coupling recess Undo retainer strap 2. X Remove ball coupling 1 from the ball coupling recess. Vehicles with ECO start/stop function*: the attachable ball coupling is in the ball coupling recess in the stowage well underneath the luggage compartment floor (Y page 201). X Open the luggage compartment floor. X X Remove ball coupling 1 from the ball coupling recess.2 1 Protective cap 186 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 187 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Trailer towing* Pull protective cap 1 down in the direction of the arrow out of the ball coupling recess. X Place protective cap 1 into the ball coupling recess. X 3 Ball coupling recess 4 Handwheel Pull handwheel 4 away from the ball coupling and turn it clockwise until it engages. The green area on the ball coupling is aligned with the red mark on the handwheel. X Insert the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow into ball coupling recess 3 until it engages. Handwheel 4 turns so that green mark 5 on the handwheel is aligned with green area 6 on the ball coupling. X 1 Key 2 Protective cap Pull protective cap 2 off the lock in the handwheel. X Insert key 1 into the ignition lock. The red mark on the handwheel must be aligned with the green area on the ball coupling (fitting position). If this is not the case: X Turn key 1 in the direction of the arrow. The key is released. X 1 Key 2 Protective cap 5 Green mark on the handwheel 6 Green area on the ball coupling Turn key 1 to the stop in the direction of the arrow to lock. X Remove key 1. X Press protective cap 2 onto the lock. X i You can store the key in the ball coupling stowage compartment in the luggage compartment. Z * optional 187 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 188 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Trailer towing* 1 Trailer power socket X Fold trailer power socket 1 down. G Risk of accident The ball coupling is only securely mounted when the green mark on the handwheel is aligned with the green area on the ball coupling and the key can be removed. If the ball coupling is not securely mounted, it may come loose. The ball coupling must be locked and the key must be removed when towing a trailer. This is the only way to guarantee that the ball coupling is secured and cannot come loose while the vehicle is in motion. If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the key cannot be removed, remove the ball coupling and clean it. 188 If the ball coupling can still not be fitted (locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer coupling must then not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation is not guaranteed. Have the entire trailer coupling checked at a qualified specialist workshop. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on towing a trailer G Risk of accident When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the tow- ing vehicle Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle in the "Technical data" section. You will find installation dimensions and loads in the "Technical data" section (Y page 290). The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight on the ball coupling is 75 kg. However, the actual drawbar load must not exceed the value given on the trailer coupling and trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 189 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Trailer towing* not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. i The height of the ball coupling changes with the load of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. Coupling up a trailer G Risk of injury Do not connect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could become trapped between the bumper and drawbar. ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged by the spring action of the overrun brake. Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. X * optional Driving tips In Germany, the maximum permitted speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h. G Risk of accident A maximum speed of 80 km/h should not be exceeded, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/ trailer combinations. This lowers the risk of an accident. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas Ris an increased braking distance affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rconsumes more fuel On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select a lower gear in good time, or in vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control* or Speedtronic*. This will use the braking effect of the engine, so less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Driving tips RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, 189 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 190 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Trailer towing* note that the power output of the engine, and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: X Do not accelerate. X Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. G Risk of accident On no account should you attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing speed. Removing the ball coupling Pull the protective cap off the lock in the handwheel. X Insert the key into the lock in the handwheel. X Turn the key clockwise. The lock is unlocked. X Hold the ball coupling. Pull the handwheel away from the ball coupling and turn it clockwise until it engages. The green area on the ball coupling is aligned with the red mark on the handwheel. X 190 Pull out the ball coupling downwards. Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. X Vehicles without ECO start/stop function*: open the stowage compartment on the right of the luggage compartment. X Fold the trim downwards. X Vehicles with start/stop function*: open the luggage compartment floor. X Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling recess. X Press the protective cap into the ball coupling recess until it engages. X Rbrake X Rchange Storing the ball coupling Store the ball coupling with the key inserted in the ball coupling recess. X Vehicle without ECO start/stop function: Secure the ball coupling in place using the retainer strap. X G Risk of accident Never transport an unsecured ball coupling in the interior of the vehicle. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the ball coupling being thrown if you: Rhave sharply direction suddenly an accident Trailer power supply When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's trailer socket outlet is equipped with a permanent power supply and a power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. The power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin 10. ! You can connect consumers with a power rating of up to 240 W to the permanent power supply and up to 180 W to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer's turn signal lamps are only guaranteed to function when bulbs are used. You can obtain further information about installing the trailer electrics from a qualified * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 191 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Service specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To switch the switched power supply on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or 0, respectively. Trailer with 7-pin connector If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Fold down socket . Open the socket cover. X Insert the connector with lug 1 into groove 2 on the socket and turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Make the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. X X ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable Service ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service indicator informs you of the next service due date. The multifunction display shows the service due date: Service A due in ..days Service A due in .. km Service A due now play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. Fitting the adapter Next service due (example) 1 Connector with lug 2 Socket with groove The letter indicates how much time the workshop will require to carry out the service work. The letters displayed range from A for a short service duration to H for a long service duration. The ASSYST PLUS service interval indicator does not take into account any periods of 191 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 192 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed before disconnecting the battery. or X Subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display after reconnecting the battery. Fading out the service message Service due date exceeded The multi-function display shows one of the following messages: Service A overdue by .. days Service A overdue by .. km You will also hear a warning tone. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service indicator after the necessary service work has been carried out. i If you fail to have the service performed by the specified date, you may be violating applicable laws. Your warranty may be invalidated and goodwill settlements may be refused. Calling up the service due date X Press reset button 1. 192 Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the ignition. X Press the è or ÿ button to select the standard display (Y page 103). X Press the j or k button to select the service information. The multi-function display shows the 9 symbol and the service due date. Care Notes on care Regular and proper care maintains the value of your vehicle. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Repair damage caused by loose chippings and remove the following substances immediately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard: RSoak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off afterwards. RSoak bird droppings with water and rinse off afterwards. RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. RUse silicone remover to remove wax. RUse tar remover to remove tar stains. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 193 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not affix to painted surfaces or plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic Rscented plates oil bottle or similar items You could otherwise damage the paint finish or plastic. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windscreen and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away leading to corrosion damage. Vehicle care ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, especially if the wheels have just been cleaned with a wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause rapid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park the vehicle when it is at normal operating temperature. Automatic car wash You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the beginning. ! Do not use a touch-free automatic car wash that uses chemical agents to wash the vehicle. Preferably use automatic car washes with high-pressure jets for pre-washing. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the exterior mirrors. ! Make sure that the side windows are com- pletely closed, that the ventilation/heater blower is fully turned off and that the windscreen wiper switch is set to 0. The rain sensor may otherwise be activated, triggering unintended wiper movements. This could cause damage to the vehicle. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax and drying agents from the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. High-pressure cleaners G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle or ― especially ― the tyres. Otherwise, you could damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle (at least 30 cm). Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. 193 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 194 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care RBattery Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position I (Y page 83) on the combination switch. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 62) or remove it when the wiper arms are vertical. Rconnectors ! Only fold the windscreen wipers away i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen. X Wipe the windscreen and wiper blades with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth) and cleaning agent. X Fold the wiper arms back on to the windscreen before the ignition is switched on. Cleaning the headlamps Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor joint Relectrical components Rlights elements Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to failures or leaks. Cleaning the wiper blades and the outside of the windscreen G Risk of injury Before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, turn the key in the ignition to 0. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers may move and injure you. X ! Do not clean the wiper blades too often as this will result in damage to the surface coating, leading to wiper noise. Cleaning the windows ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Clean the insides of the windows with a damp cloth or commercially-available glass 194 the windows could interfere with radio or mobile phone reception, especially if it is conductive or metal-coated film. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. from the windscreen when vertical, otherwise you will damage the bonnet. Rseals Rtrim cleaner. Avoid touching the inside of the rear windscreen and the side windows with hard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. You could otherwise cause damage to the windows, rear window heating or aerial on the rear window. X X Clean the plastic lenses of the headlamps with a damp sponge. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use: Rdry cloths Rabrasive products Rsolvents Rcleaning products containing solvents Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 195 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care You could otherwise scratch or damage the surface of the lenses. Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage the surfaces. ! In order to protect the vehicle's high-quality surfaces and to retain the overall appearance, avoid contact with cosmetics and suntan lotion. Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g. a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water. X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is solvent-free and non-corrosive. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this purpose. X Cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water. Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard. X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent. X X * optional G Risk of injury Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing solvents cause the surface to become porous and in the event of an airbag being triggered, plastic parts that have become loose could cause considerable injuries. Cleaning the leather upholstery* ! Cleaning RClean genuine leather covers using a damp cloth, then wipe the covers down using a dry cloth. Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. For leather care, use leather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10. You can purchase this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing-up liquid). RClean fabric covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). When cleaning, take care not to rub too vigorously and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean Alcantara covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. i Note that leather covers are a natural product and as such are subject to a natural ageing process and may react differently (e.g. increased wrinkling) to certain environmental influences (such as high humidity, intense heat). Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the quality (both appearance and comfort) of the covers is retained over time. Cleaning the trim strips (three-door vehicles) ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the trim strips below the side windows. You may otherwise damage the surface of the trim strips. Cleaning the padded table* The plastic parts of the padded table can be cleaned using a detergent solution. 195 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 196 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care The fabric cover can be cleaned using a detergent solution or an upholstery cleaner. i The cover cannot be removed. Cleaning Parktronic* The sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes Dirt combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will ensure that their original shine is restored. Trailer coupling* The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove any rust using a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. ! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents such as wheel cleaner. Use the chrome-cleaning agent recommended by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Information about chrome-cleaning agents can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Parktronic* sensors in the left-hand side of the front bumper. X Clean sensors 1 in the bumper with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or damage the sensors. If you intend to use a high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to clean the sensors, observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle. 196 1 Locking balls 2 Guide pin 3 Guide faces 4 Release lever 5 Ball neck head * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 197 Version: 2.10.6 Operation Care Lightly oil or grease positions 1 to 5 and the ball coupling recess of the vehicle after cleaning. X Treat the lock with an oil that is acid and resin-free. X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is working properly. X ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. i Maintenance of the ball coupling and trailer coupling can also be performed by any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. Z 197 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 198 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 198 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 199 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Where will I find...? ........................... Display messages ............................. Troubleshooting ................................ Locking/unlocking in an emergency ................................................. Changing the batteries ..................... Changing the bulbs ........................... Replacing the wiper blades .............. Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. 200 202 222 241 244 245 251 253 263 266 268 271 199 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 200 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Where will I find...? Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit, jack, firstaid kit, warning triangle and folding wheel chock 4 Vehicle tool kit and folding wheel chock 5 TIREFIT kit First-aid kit The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT kit, jack, first-aid kit, warning triangle and folding wheel chock are located in the left-hand stowage compartment in the luggage compartment. i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit i When using the jack, you should also Removing the first-aid kit observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 253). regularly, and replace the contents if necessary. X X Remove the retaining cross. Remove first-aid kit 1. Warning triangle Fold the stowage space cover down (Y page 161). X Release the Velcro fastening. X Remove warning triangle 3. X 1 First-aid kit (electric air pump behind it) 2 Jack 3 Warning triangle 200 Setting up the warning triangle 1 Retainer 2 Side reflectors 3 Feet X X Fold feet 3 down and out to the side. Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using retainer 1. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 201 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Where will I find...? Setting up the foldable wheel chock The folding wheel chock serves as an additional measure for securing the vehicle against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is being changed. Fire extinguisher* i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every one or two years. Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. Spare wheel*/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel* X Open the luggage compartment floor (Y page 155). Vehicles with ECO start/stop function* The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front of the driver's seat. 1 To fold the plates upwards 2 To fold out the lower plate 3 To insert the plate Fold both plates 1 upwards. Fold out lower plate 2. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into openings in base plate 3. X X 1 Tab 2 Fire extinguisher X X Pull tab 1 upwards. Remove fire extinguisher 2. 1 Ball coupling 2 Ball coupling stowage well X Remove ball coupling stowage well 2 and ball coupling 1. Z * optional 201 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 202 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Vehicles without ECO start/stop function* 1 Retaining screw 2 Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel All vehicles X Turn retaining screw 1 anti-clockwise. i Vehicles with a subwoofer mounted in the emergency spare wheel: You must observe the information labels on the subwoofer when removing it. X Remove spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency spare wheel 2. 202 Display messages Notes The on-board computer shows warnings or malfunctions in the multi-function display. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone or a continuous tone. The multi-function display shows high-priority display messages in red. In the following tables, these display messages are printed in red. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display fails. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary special- ist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The following tables contain all the display messages. Hiding display messages After a few seconds, the on-board computer automatically hides some low priority display messages. Other messages remain visible in the multi-function display until you hide them yourself. Some high priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multi-function display shows these messages continuously until the causes of the messages have been remedied. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Use the è, ·, j or k button to select another display. The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory (Y page 106). * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 203 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Text messages G Risk of accident and injury If maintenance work is carried out incorrectly this can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. You risk losing control of your vehicle and thereby causing an accident. The safety systems may also no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, all work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 203 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 204 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded ABS ABS, ESP unavailable See Owner's Manual Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The maximum speed has been exceeded26. X Drive slower. X Carefully drive a short, lightly curving stretch of road at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, ABS and ESP® are available again. G Risk of accident ESP® ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily unavailable. The self-diagnosis is, for example, not yet complete. The following systems are also unavailable: RBAS (Brake Assist) Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. 26 Only 204 for certain countries. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 205 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable ately. due to undervoltage. The battery is, for X Observe the additional messages in the multiexample, not being charged. function display (Y page 202). The following systems are also unavailable: G Risk of accident X RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Z 205 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 206 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ABS Possible cause/consequence ABS, ESP inoperative See Owner's Manual G Risk of accident ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. The following systems are also unavailable: RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. 206 Possible solution Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 207 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ESP Possible cause/consequence unavailable See Owner's Manual G Risk of accident ESP® is temporarily unavailable. The selfdiagnosis is, for example, not yet complete. The following systems are also unavailable: Possible solution X Carefully drive a short, lightly curving stretch of road at a speed above 20 km/h. If the display message disappears, ESP® is available again. RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Z 207 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 208 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence G Risk of accident ESP® is unavailable due to undervoltage. The battery is, for example, not being charged. The following systems are also unavailable: RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. 208 Possible solution Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display (Y page 202). X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 209 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ESP Possible cause/consequence inoperative See Owner's Manual Possible solution Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction. ately. The following systems are also unavailable: G Risk of accident X RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. Vehicle Shift to N * optional Consult workshop to start The multi-function display additionally shows an F in the position display. Safe operation of AUTOTRONIC* can no longer be fully guaranteed. X Stop in accordance with traffic conditions. Move the selector lever to P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. X Drive on carefully. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: the selector lever is not in position N or P. X X Move the selector lever to position N or P. Z 209 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 210 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the operational readiness symbol appears in the multi-function display (Y page 113). The driver’s door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X Make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched while steering intervention is active. The vehicle started to skid and ESP® intervened. X Use the Active Park Assist* system later. You have just performed a large number of turning or parking manoeuvres. Active Park Assist* will become available again after approximately 10 minutes. X Stop in accordance with traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. X If the warning message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC* is inoperative. X Park Assist Park Assist 210 cancelled inoperative Observe the notes on PARKTRONIC* in the "Troubleshooting" section (Y page 236). * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 211 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Tyre press. Check tyres Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention The tyre pressure loss warning system has to traffic conditions as you do so. detected a significant loss in pressure. X Check the tyres. X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 178). X If necessary, repair the faulty tyre or change the wheel (Y page 253). X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 179). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Check tyres Then restart Run Flat Indicator A tyre pressure loss warning system display message appeared. X Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SRS Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. G Risk of accident G Risk of injury There is a malfunction in the restraint system. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Correct the tyre pressure on all tyres (Y page 178). X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 179). Z 211 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 212 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Symbol messages G Risk of accident and injury If maintenance work is carried out incorrectly this can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. You risk losing control of your vehicle and thereby causing an accident. The safety systems may also no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, all work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible cause/consequence < G Risk of injury X Ask occupants in the rear to fasten their seat belts. If the symbol appears in the multi-function Further information on the status indicator for the display, a seat belt buckle has been rear seat belts* (Y page 76). released on a rear seat during the journey. 1 2 ± The tailgate is open. X Close the tailgate. At least one door is open. X Close the doors. Some electronic systems are unable to send information to the on-board computer. The following functions may be malfunctioning: Rcoolant temperature display X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rrev counter Rcruise 212 Possible solution control* or Speedtronic* display * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 213 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution D The engine fan is faulty. X # The battery is not being charged. One (or more) of the following could be the cause: X 2 Brake wear Ra faulty alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-andgo driving. Stop immediately and safely when traffic conditions permit and switch off the engine. X Check the poly-V-belt. X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board voltage is too high. X Have the alternator checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 213 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 214 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution 3 Check brake fluid level ! Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. [ Clean fuel filter There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off27. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. D Coolant Stop car, turn eng. off The coolant is too hot. X 27 Only 214 for certain countries. G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Make sure, that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g. by slush. X Restart the engine only when the display message disappears. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 215 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The poly-V-belt may have torn. X X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Check the poly-V-belt. X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: do not start the engine again until the display message disappears. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage. B Top up coolant See Owner's Manual The coolant level is too low. 3 Power steer. malfunction Consult workshop Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. There is no power assistance for the steerX If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive ing. You will need to use more force to on to a qualified specialist workshop. steer. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive The steering assistant STEER CONTROL is on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist also deactivated. workshop. G Risk of accident Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 175). X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 215 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 216 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Cornering light left or Cornering light right The left-hand or right-hand cornering light* is faulty. X . Dipped-beam left or Dipped-beam right Vehicles with the light and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand dippedbeam headlamp is faulty. X . AUTO lights inoperative The light sensor is faulty. The constant headlamp mode (daytime driving lights) is switched on. X . Trailer turn signal left or Trailer turn signal right The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty. X Change the bulb. . Trailer tail lamp left or Trailer tail lamp right The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail light is faulty. X Change the bulb. 216 Change the bulb (Y page 245). Halogen headlamp: replace the bulbs (Y page 245). X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop. Switch the lights to manual control in the onboard computer (Y page 109). X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 217 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Turn signal rear left or Turn signal rear right The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). . Turn signal left mirror or Turn signal right mirror The turn signal in the left-hand or righthand exterior mirror is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Turn signal front left or Turn signal front right The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). . Brake/tail lamp left or Brake/tail lamp right Vehicles with light and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand brake lamp is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). . 3rd brake lamp Vehicles with the lights and visibility package*: the third brake lamp is faulty. The display message will only appear if all LEDs are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Z 217 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 218 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Main-beam left or Main-beam right Vehicles with light and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand high beam is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). . Licence plate lamp Vehicles with the lights and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Switch off lights The light is switched on when you leave the vehicle. X Turn the light switch to M or U. or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. . Foglamp left or Foglamp right Vehicles with the lights and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand foglamp* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left-hand Tail lamp/rear foglamp or Right-hand Tail lamp/rear foglamp Vehicles with lights and visibility package*: the tail lamp or the rear foglamp is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). . Parking lamp front left or Parking lamp front right Vehicles with the lights and visibility package*: the front left-hand or front righthand parking lamp is faulty. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). 218 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 219 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Reversing lamp left or Reversing lamp right Vehicles with lights and visibility package*: the left-hand or right-hand reversing light is faulty. X N Add 1.0 litreof engine oil when next refuelling Vehicles with a diesel engine: the oil level is too low. X N Vehicles with a petrol engine: the engine Engine oil pressure Stop car, turn oil pressure is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. eng. off X N Eng. oil level Check level Vehicles with a petrol engine: the oil level is too low. X N Eng. oil level Stop Vehicles with a diesel engine: the oil level car, turn eng. off is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Change the bulb (Y page 245). Check the oil level (Y page 173). If necessary, top up the motor oil. X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. X Stop in accordance with traffic conditions. Switch off the engine. X Check the oil level (Y page 173). X If necessary, top up the motor oil. X Check the oil level (Y page 173). If necessary, top up the motor oil. X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. X Stop in accordance with traffic conditions. Switch off the engine. X Top up the engine oil and check the level (Y page 173). X Z * optional 219 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 220 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution N Engine oil level Reduce oil level Vehicles with a diesel engine: you have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level. Observe the legal requirements. N Cannot measure oil level Vehicles with a diesel engine: the measuring system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. I Key does not belong You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock. to vehicle X Use the correct key. I I Ñ Remove key The key is in the ignition lock. X Remove the key. Replace key The key needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. SPEEDTRONIC inoperative Speedtronic* and cruise control* are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. ¿ 4 Reserve fuel level The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. t Enter PIN You have not yet logged on to your mobile phone*. X Enter the PIN for the SIM card. 220 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 221 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the audio system* or COMAND APS* is not activated. X If desired, activate the Bluetooth connection between the mobile phone and the audio system* or COMAND APS* (see separate operating instructions). t No telephone Your mobile phone is not inserted in the bracket*. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket* (Y page 164). W Top up washer fluid Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*: The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the windscreen washer fluid (Y page 175). Z * optional 221 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 222 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Points to remember G Risk of accident and injury If maintenance work is carried out incorrectly this can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. You risk losing control of your vehicle and thereby causing an accident. The safety systems may also no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, all work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in switches and buttons Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions One or all of the indicator lamps in the seat heating* button are flashing. The seat heating* has switched itself off automatically. The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. reading lamp or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation* will switch back on automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp in the 2 Cooling has been deactivated button on the air-conditioning*/ due to a malfunction. Thermotronic* control panel lights up. The cooling system cannot be switched on. 222 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 223 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence The indicator lamp in the F/ The on-board voltage is too low, 1 rear-window heating button because too many consumers are is flashing. The rear-window heat- switched on. ing has switched itself off prematurely or cannot be switched on. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat: The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is lit. Suggested solutions X Switch off consumers that are not required, e. g. reading lamp or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating will switch back on automatically. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, for example Rnotebook A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired. G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The automatic child seat recognition is malfunctioning. Rmobile Rcards phone with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit: You have started the engine with the key. The indicator lamp in the ECO start/stop function* button does not light up or goes out again after a short time. * optional X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. You have deactivated the ECO start/stop function*. X Activate the ECO start/stop function* again. The ECO start/stop function*is not available due to a fault. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 223 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 224 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Problem Possible cause/consequence - The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Drive on carefully. Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is (Y page 202). deactivated due to a fault. ThereX ® Visit a qualified specialist workshop. fore, ESP (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), the steering assistant STEER CONTROL, the hill start assist and the tyre pressure loss warning system are also deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without electronic support. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard. If the ABS control unit is faulty, other systems may also not be available: e.g. Parktronic system*, the navigation system* or the Autotronic*. - The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. 224 Suggested solutions G Risk of accident X G Risk of accident X The on-board voltage is too low. ABS has been deactivated due to undervoltage. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e g. reading lamps or interior lighting. ABS will be available again as soon as the vehicle's electrical system voltage increases. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 225 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions ESP®, Therefore, BAS, the steering assistant STEER CONTROL, hill start assist and the tyre pressure loss warning system are also deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without electronic support. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard. v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident lamp is lit while the engine ESP® is unavailable due to a malis running. In addition, a function. message appears in the The following systems have also multi-function display. been deactivated: Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 202). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X RBAS Rthe steering assistant STEER CONTROL Rhill start assist Rthe tyre pressure loss warning system The braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect but without the above functions. Z 225 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 226 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence v The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. ESP® or traction control has X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving. intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. has started to spin. G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X 1 The red SRS warning lamp G Risk of injury is lit while the engine is There is a malfunction in the running. restraint system. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 1 The red SRS warning lamp The connector on the removable is lit while the engine is front-passenger seat* is running. In addition, the detached. indicator lamp 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF flashes in the centre console and a warning tone sounds. X Attach the connector to the coupling on the seat (Y page 156). H The red brake system You are driving with the parking warning lamp comes on brake applied. while you are driving. A warning tone also sounds. X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. 226 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 227 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence H The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstanThere is insufficient brake fluid in ces. the fluid reservoir. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 202). Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X ± The yellow engine diagnos- Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tics warning lamp lights up fuel tank has been run dry. while the engine is running. X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. ± The yellow engine diagnos- There may be a fault, for example tics warning lamp lights up Rin the engine management while the engine is runRin the ignition system ning. Rin the exhaust system X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines) The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine can run in emergency mode. Z 227 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 228 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions < The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts up28. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 73). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 73). The warning tone ceases. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 73). The warning lamp goes out. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out. < After the engine starts, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds28. < The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's door or the front-passenger door is closed. 28 Only 228 for certain countries. G Risk of injury The driver's seat belt is not fastened. G Risk of injury The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt G Risk of injury There are objects on the frontpassenger seat Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 229 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem < The red warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of injury Suggested solutions X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 73). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. G Risk of injury There are objects on the frontpassenger seat and you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h. The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. Z 229 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 230 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Warning tones Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The anti-theft warning alarm* is triggered. You have opened the vehicle with the anti-theft alarm system still activated*. X Switch off the alarm (Y page 57). You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multifunction display. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 202). You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. The light is switched on when you X Turn the light switch to M or U. leave the vehicle. or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. G Risk of injury X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 73). The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt 230 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 231 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You hear a warning tone. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*: You have: X Rswitched Ropened Move the selector lever to P. off the engine the driver's door Rnot moved the selector lever to position P Accident Problem Possible cause/consequence Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Switch off the ignition immediately. Remove the ignition key. The fuel line or the fuel tank has Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel been damaged. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of fire Suggested solutions X X You are unable to determine the extent of the damage. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal. Z * optional 231 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 232 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Fuel and fuel tank Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. The fuel tank in a diesel engine vehicle has been run completely dry and the engine will not start. 232 The fuel filler flap is not released. Suggested solutions Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 241). or X Unlock the vehicle manually (Y page 242). The opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. There is air in the fuel system. Refuel the vehicle. Switch on the ignition for approximately 10 seconds (key in position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock). X Start the engine continuously for up to 40 seconds until it runs smoothly. The fuel system is now free of air. If the engine does not start: X Wait two minutes. X Repeat the starting procedure for up to 40 seconds. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 233 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Engine Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. RThe X engine electronics system is malfunctioning. Turn the key back to position 0 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock before the next starting attempt. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 87). When doing so, remember RThere is a malfunction in the that excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine will fuel supply. drain the battery. RThe on-board voltage is too low If the engine does not start after several attempts: because the starter battery is X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. too weak or discharged. The engine will not start. You can The fuel tank has been run dry. hear the starter motor operating. The reserve fuel warning lamp is on and the fuel gauge shows 0. X X Refuel the vehicle. Bleed the fuel system (Y page 232). The engine will not start. You can- The on-board voltage is too low X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 266). not hear the starter motor oper- because the starter battery is too If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it: ating. weak or discharged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 233 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 234 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine control unit. X A coolant temperature of over 120 °C is displayed. The coolant warning lamp may also be on and a warning tone may sound (Y page 97). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X 234 Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 175). Observe the warning notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 235 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting AUTOTRONIC* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear The transmission is losing oil. X The acceleration ability is deteri- The transmission is in emergency orating. mode. The one-touch gearshifting is no longer working. The transmission no longer changes gear. Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Stop the vehicle. Move the selector lever to position P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X X Z * optional 235 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 236 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Parktronic* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned Parktronic warning display are lit. and has switched itself off. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic button lights up. X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty Parktronic warning display are lit. or there is interference. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. X X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 196). Switch the ignition back on. Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by an Parktronic warning display are lit. external source of radio or ultraParktronic is deactivated after sound waves. approximately 20 seconds. X See if Parktronic functions in a different location. 236 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 237 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Headlamps Problem Possible cause/consequence The headlamps or the turn signals Air humidity is very high. in the exterior mirrors are misted up on the inside. The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able to enter. Suggested solutions X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The headlamps are demisted after a short distance. X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen wipers Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X The windscreen wipers fail completely. G Risk of accident The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. X X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 237 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 238 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Side windows Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions A side window will not close. Objects are trapped between the window and the door frame. X There are objects in the window guide rail which are preventing the window from closing. X You cannot see the cause. X Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. Remove the objects. Close the side window. Close the side window with increased force or without the antientrapment feature (Y page 85). Mirrors Problem An exterior mirror has been pushed out of position. Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electrically: X Move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*: X 238 Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 71) repeatedly until you hear a distinct click. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror as usual (Y page 71). * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 239 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Key Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X The key is faulty. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 241). X Check the key batteries (Y page 244) and replace them if necessary (Y page 244). Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 241). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The battery charge indicator lamp The key batteries are discharged. of the key does not go on during the test. X You have lost a key. X Change the batteries (Y page 244). Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. X You have lost the emergency key element. The engine cannot be started using the key. X X The steering lock is mechanically blocked. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions. 239 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 240 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Troubleshooting Trailer towing Problem Possible cause/consequence The ball coupling cannot be G Risk of accident locked. The ball coupling is dirty. The key cannot be removed from The trailer tow hitch is damaged. the ball coupling. Suggested solutions Remove the ball coupling and clean it (Y page 196). If the ball coupling still cannot be locked, remove the ball coupling. It must no longer be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation is not guaranteed. X Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Parking up the vehicle Problem Possible cause/consequence The vehicle is to be left parked up Damage resulting from non-use for longer than six weeks. may occur if the vehicle is parked up for long periods. 240 Suggested solutions X X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Disconnect the battery (Y page 265). Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 241 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Locking/unlocking in an emergency Emergency key If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the key, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door, the antitheft alarm system* will be triggered (Y page 57). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X Press the k or j button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the key in the ignition lock. Releasing and removing the emergency key element X Unlocking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 241). Push release catch 1 in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove emergency key element 2 from the key. $ To unlock Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Firmly turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position $ and hold it in this position. X i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X * optional Pull the door handle firmly. The locking knob pops up. The door is unlocked. Z 241 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 242 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Pull the door handle again. X Locking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be locked centrally with the key: 5-door Close the front-passenger door, the rear door on the front-passenger side and the tailgate. X Open the driver’s door and the rear door on the driver’s side. X Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 61). The locking knobs in the front-passenger door and in the rear doors drop down. X Press the locking knobs in the frontpassenger and rear doors down manually, if necessary. X Close the driver's door from the outside. X Press down the locking knob in the driver's door by reaching through the open rear door. X 242 i Make sure that you have the key with you and have not left it in the vehicle. X Close the rear door on the driver’s side. The vehicle is locked. 3-door Close the front-passenger door. Open the driver's door and the tailgate. X Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 61). The locking knob in the front-passenger door moves down. X Press down the locking knob manually, if necessary. X Close the driver's door from the outside. X Press down the locking knob in the driver's door by reaching through the open tailgate. X X Emergency fuel filler flap release G Risk of injury The corners of the vehicle walls may be sharp-edged. You could injure yourself while carrying out an emergency release of the fuel filler flap. Avoid contact with the edges of the vehicle walls. The emergency release is located on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment, behind the side trim panel when viewed in the direction of travel. X Open the tailgate. X Open the cover on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment (Y page 161). i Make sure that you have the key with you and have not left it in the vehicle. X Close the tailgate. The vehicle is locked. 1 Emergency release Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 243 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Pull emergency release 1 in the direction of the arrow. The fuel filler flap is unlocked. X Open the fuel filler flap. X Vehicles with the CLASSIC or AVANTGARDE*design/trim level Vehicles with the ELEGANCE*design/ trim level or with the optional front compartment armrest* Releasing the parking lock manually on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to tow the vehicle away. Releasing the parking lock manually 1 Screwdriver or similar implement Insert implement 1 into the opening. Push implement 1 in the direction of the arrow and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. X Remove implement 1. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. X X 1 Cup holder Apply the parking brake. X Pull up cup holder 1. X * optional Releasing the parking lock manually 1 Screwdriver or similar implement 2 Release pin G Risk of injury Release pin 2 can become very hot. Therefore only press the release pin with a suitable screwdriver or similar implement; otherwise, you could burn yourself. X Use implement 1 to press release pin 2 and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. 243 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 244 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the batteries Changing the batteries Notes It is advisable to have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of poisoning Batteries contain toxic and caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. Key Checking the batteries X Press the j or k button. The batteries are in order if the battery charge indicator lamp lights up briefly. Using emergency key element 1, press the grey release catch in the opening in the direction of arrow 2. Battery tray 4 is released. X Pull battery tray 4 out of the key in the direction of arrow 3. X Changing the batteries You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 241). H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish, as they contain highly toxic substances. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. 1 Emergency key element 2 To release the battery tray 3 To pull out the battery tray 4 Battery tray 244 Remove old batteries 1 from the battery tray. X Insert the new batteries underneath contact spring 2 with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Push the battery tray back into the key housing until the battery tray engages. X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 245 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Changing the bulbs Notes on changing bulbs Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. G Risk of injury Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. contacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, never remove the cover from xenon bulbs. Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview G Risk of injury Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric Z 245 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 246 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Front bulbs Rear bulbs Bulb Type Additional turn signal lamp LEDs29 2 Parking lamp/ side lamp W5W 3 Main-beam headlamps30/ cornering light*31 H7 55 W Dipped-beam headlamps H7 55 W30 or D1S 35 W*32 1 4 RSide Bulb Type Third brake lamp LED29 8 Licence plate lamp C5W 9 Rear foglamp P 21 W Tail lamp P4W 7 a Turn signal lamp PY 21 W b Reversing lamp P 21 W c Brake lamp P 21 W 5 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W Before changing bulbs 6 Front foglamps* H11 55 W33 You can replace the following bulbs: RDipped-beam lamps) RMain-beam lamps) headlamps (halogen head- headlamps (halogen head- lamp/parking lamp (halogen headlamps) RCornering light* (vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*) RFront turn signal lamp RBrake lamp RReversing lamp RRear foglamp/tail lamp RTurn signal lamp (rear) RLicence plate lamp Observe the following points: RUse only the bulb types specified here. RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off the lights before changing a bulb. ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth. RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers. RIf the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 29 LEDs must not be replaced, as they are designed to have an unlimited service life. with halogen headlamps. 31 Vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps* 32 Vehicles with xenon headlamps*: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 33 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 30 Vehicles 246 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 247 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs i Due to the location of the bulbs in the front headlamps, it is best to have these changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Have the headlamp setting checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing the front bulbs X X To close: fold the cover upwards. Screw in retaining screw 1. Removing/fitting the washer fluid reservoir You must remove the washer fluid reservoir from the engine compartment before you can replace the bulbs in the front left-hand headlamp. To fit: guide the lower retaining lug into the rubber grommet on the longitudinal member and fit washer fluid reservoir 2 into bracket 3. X Turn retaining screw 1 clockwise. X Replacing the bulbs in the dipped-beam headlamp (halogen headlamps) Opening/closing the cover in the front wheel arch Switch off the lights. Open the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 247). X Open the bonnet. X Left-hand headlamps: remove the washer fluid reservoir (Y page 247). X Press retaining lug : down and remove housing cover 2. X Pull connector = from bulb holder 4. X To remove: turn retaining screw 1 anticlockwise. X Remove washer fluid reservoir 2 from bracket 3. X Put washer fluid reservoir 2 to one side and leave the lines and hoses connected. Make sure that no washer fluid escapes. X To open: turn the front wheels inwards. Unscrew retaining screw 1. X Fold the cover down. X X X 247 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 248 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Turn bulb holder 4 anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Remove the bulb from bulb holder 4. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 4. X Insert bulb holder 4 and turn it clockwise. X Attach connector = to bulb holder 4. X Align the bottom of housing cover 2 and fold it upwards until it engages. X Main-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)/cornering light*(bi-xenon headlamps*) Remove the washer fluid reservoir (Y page 247). X Press retaining lug 1 down and remove housing cover ;. X Main-beam headlamps: pull connector = from the bulb. X Turn housing cover ? anti-clockwise. X Remove the bulb. X Insert the new bulb so that it is flush. X Turn housing cover ? clockwise. X Main-beam headlamps: attach connector = to the bulb. X Align the bottom of housing cover ; and fold it upwards until it engages. X Replacing the bulb in the side lamp/ parking lamp (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 247). X Open the bonnet. X Remove the washer fluid reservoir (Y page 247). X Press retaining lug : down and remove housing cover ;. X Pull out bulb holder =. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying slight pressure, and remove it from bulb holder =. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder = and turn it clockwise. X Insert bulb holder =. X Align the bottom of housing cover ; and fold it upwards until it engages. X X Switch off the lights. Open the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 247). X Open the bonnet. X X 248 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 249 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Replacing the turn signal lamps Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and turn clockwise while applying slight pressure. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise. X Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels Switch off the lights. X Open the cover in the front wheel arch (Y page 247). X Open the bonnet. X Left-hand headlamp: remove the washer fluid reservoir (Y page 247). X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying slight pressure, and remove it from bulb holder :. X You must open the side trim panel in the luggage compartment before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. Left-hand side trim panel Right-hand side trim panel Opening X Turn release catch 1 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove side trim panel 2. X Left side: remove the compressor. X Right side: remove the stowage compartment. Closing X Left side: insert the compressor. X Right side: insert the stowage compartment. X Insert side trim panel 2 and turn catch 1 90° in the opposite direction to the arrow. 249 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 250 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Changing the tail lamps Changing the bulbs in the licence plate lamps Switch off the lights. Open the luggage compartment. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 249). X X Bulb holder 1 Brake lamp 2 Reversing lamp 3 Turn signal lamp Bulb holder X Press retaining lugs 1 simultaneously in the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb holder out. 250 4 Rear foglamp/tail lamp Lightly press the corresponding bulb into the holder, turn it anti-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the corresponding new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Attach the bulb holder and press firmly. The retaining lugs on the bulb holder engages audibly. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 249). X Switch off the lights. Open the tailgate. X Using a screwdriver, loosen both sides of licence plate lamp 1 in the direction of the arrow. X Remove licence plate lamp 1. X Replace the bulb. X Insert licence plate lamp 1 and press it in until it engages. X X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 251 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades Position the new wiper blade 1 with recess 6 on lug 5. X Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 3 onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips 2 engage in bracket 4. X Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. Replacing the wiper blades X Windscreen wiper blades G Risk of accident The windscreen will not longer be properly wiped if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. G Risk of accident The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. ! Make sure that you touch only the wiper Press both release clips 2. Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 3 away from wiper arm 4. X Remove wiper blade 1 in the direction of the arrow 5. X X Fitting Rear window wiper blade G Risk of injury The wiper arm could be set in motion and injure you if the windscreen wipers are switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blade. arm of the windscreen wiper to avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades. Removing X X Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen. Z 251 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 252 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades Removing Turn wiper blade 1 parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear window. X Adjusting the spraying nozzles Check the spraying nozzles setting regularly. If they have moved, you can readjust them yourself. G Risk of injury Remove the key from the ignition lock. Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window until it engages. X Turn wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 2 until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Remove wiper blade 1. X X Fitting Push the new wiper blade 1 onto the wiper arm until you feel it engage. X Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly. X 252 The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before adjusting the spraying nozzles. ! Do not use any tools, e.g. a needle, to adjust the spraying nozzles. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the spraying nozzles. Swivel spraying nozzles 1 upwards or downwards. X Wipe briefly with washer fluid to test them (Y page 83). The spraying nozzles are correctly positioned if the stream of water hits the windscreen approximately in the centre. X Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 253 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Flat tyre Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* Flat tyre equipment variants X Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 200) Ra "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* (Y page 201) Ra spare wheel* (Y page 201) Rthe MOExtended run-flat system* (Y page 262) Preparing the vehicle i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOE tyres*. Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as possible on solid, non-slippery, level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Apply the handbrake. X Vehicles with manual transmission X Shift to either first or reverse gear. Move the selector lever to P. For all vehicles All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Get out of the vehicle. X Close the driver’s door. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 200) at a suitable distance. Observe legal requirements. X Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperatures down to -20 °C. G Risk of accident In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk and tyre sealant is unable to provide breakdown assistance: Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm Rif the wheel rim is damaged Rif you have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Z * optional 253 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 254 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump from the stowage compartment (Y page 200). X RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly with water and drink plenty of water. i Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two different air pumps. Version 1 can be identified by the flap, behind which the hose with the pressure gauge and cable are located; version 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in the electric air pump. Type 1 RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo 1 Driver's field of vision sticker 2 Wheel sticker Affix part 1 of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part 2 of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. X G Risk of injury TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. 254 not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Flap G Risk of injury 3 Recess 4 On/off switch Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions shown on the sticker on the electric air pump. 7 Flange 5 Electric connector with cable 6 Air pump hose Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 255 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. Open flap 2 on the electric air pump. Pull connector 5 and air pump hose 6 from the housing. X Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange 7 of TIREFIT filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 3 of the electric air pump. X X ! Do not operate the electric air pump for a Pressure release screw b Pressure gauge Make sure pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b is fully closed. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9. X Insert plug 5 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 163) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle . X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X 8 Filler hose 9 Valve X Remove the cap from valve 9 on the faulty tyre. X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. * optional longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. X G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- 255 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 256 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. X G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz 256 Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: open pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X H Environmental note Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Type 2 G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Recess 3 On/off switch 4 Electric connector with cable 5 Air pump hose 6 Flange Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 257 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Pull connector 4 and air pump hose 5 from the housing. X Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange 6 of TIREFIT filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the electric air pump. X Insert plug 4 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 163) or into a 12 V power socket in your vehicle . X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. X 7 Valve 8 Filler hose Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7. X * optional Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. X G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X 257 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 258 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. G Risk of accident X Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The "max. 80 km/h" sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 258 9 Pressure release button a Pressure gauge If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow pressure release button 9 next to pressure gauge a. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 259 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Changing a wheel/fitting the spare wheel* G Risk of accident The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* may differ from those of the standard wheels. Your vehicle's handling characteristics will change when a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* may only be used for a short time. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h and do not deactivate ESP®. Never drive the vehicle with more than one "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted. G Risk of accident Have the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur* optional pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X On downhill gradients: place chocks or similar behind both wheels of the other axle. Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 253). X If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it. X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead position. X Take the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* out of the stowage well under the luggage compartment floor. X Take the following out of the left-hand stowage compartment in the luggage compartment Rthe vehicle tool kit X X Rthe wheel chock Rthe jack Steel wheel with wheel trim X Vehicles with steel wheels: carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. On level ground: place chocks or similar items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Z 259 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 260 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre 1 Wheel wrench X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Raising the vehicle G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you intend to work under it. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. 260 Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the tailgate is opened or closed) and you could be seriously injured. G Risk of accident If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: Rslip off the jack Rinjure Rbe you or others damaged Thus, it is important to make sure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels. 1 Jacking point 2 Jack 3 Ratchet ring spanner with socket wrench X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 261 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under jacking point 1. X Take ratchet ring spanner and socket 3 out of the vehicle tool kit. X Take ratchet ring spanner 3 out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the jack so that the lettering AUF is visible. X Raise the vehicle with ratchet ring spanner 3 until the tyre is at most three centimetres off the ground. X X Unscrew the wheel bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. This could cause damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a new wheel G Risk of accident Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Other bolts could work loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. X X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel onto the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. G Risk of accident If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the * optional Z 261 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 262 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Flat tyre Lowering the vehicle Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the lettering AB is visible. X Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet ring spanner until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment in the luggage compartment. i When you are driving with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted, the tyre pressure loss warning system* cannot function reliably. MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system. ! The maximum permissible distance which 1 – 5 Wheel bolts X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). The tightening torque is 130 Nm. G Risk of accident Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels 262 can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum range that can be driven in emergency operation is measured from the point at which the pressure loss warning message appears in the multi-function display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. G Risk of accident The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering Rwhen braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden acceleration and/or manoeuvring, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further, if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 263 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Battery RESP® is intervening constantly. Battery Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the Notes on the vehicle battery tyre. After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the wheel(s) checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, only use MOExtended spare tyres. These must be of the size specified for the vehicle. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. To prevent damage from corrosion, only replace the battery with one that has a central ventilation cover. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. G Risk of injury Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. 263 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 264 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Battery Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or to a special collection point for old batteries. G Risk of injury For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: RDo not lean over batteries. RDo not place any metal objects on a battery. You could otherwise cause a short circuit and the battery's gas mixture could ignite. RMake sure that you do not create an elec- trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The battery could be destroyed as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. ! Switch off the engine and remove the key before disconnecting or removing the terminal clamps from the battery. You may otherwise destroy electronic components, such as the alternator. i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have all work involving the battery, e.g. removing, charging and replacing, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Retaining screw 2 Cap Remove the floormat*. Remove retaining screw 1 by turning it anti-clockwise, e.g. by using a coin. X Lift up cover 2. X X Installation location of the battery Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the footwell in front of the front-passenger seat. The main fuse box is also located there. RNever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, 264 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 265 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Battery ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. Apply the handbrake and shift the selector lever to position P on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock and remove it. X Remove the negative terminal clamp from the battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal clamp. X Remove the positive terminal clamp from the battery. X Disconnect the breather hose. X 3 Negative terminal 4 Positive terminal Disconnecting the battery G Risk of accident If the battery is disconnected: Rthe brake boosting effect will not be available. Greater braking force will then be required and the brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Ryou will no longer be able to turn the key in the ignition lock. Rthe selector lever is locked in position P on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*. * optional Removing the battery Disconnect the battery (Y page 265). Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Remove the battery. X X Charging and fitting the battery G Risk of injury Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This may injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged when still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. Z 265 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 266 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Jump-starting G Risk of injury Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Reconnecting the battery ! Always reconnect the battery in the sequence described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while it is still installed. However, the battery must always be disconnected first. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the operating instructions for your battery charger. X Refit the charged battery. To do this, follow the steps described in "Removing the battery" (Y page 265) in reverse order. X Switch off all electrical consumers. Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that a cell cap is fitted on the side. X X i If the battery power supply has been inter- Jump-starting If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from an external battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RJump-starting may only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you must carry out the following tasks: Rset the time (Y page 109). ROnly use jump leads which have a sufficient Rreset the function for folding the exterior i Jump leads and further information about mirrors in/out automatically* by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 72). Rreset the side windows (Y page 85) cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery charger. 266 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 267 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Jump-starting G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns when jumpstarting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jumpstarted. G Risk of explosion Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. You will find these under "Battery" in the index. Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. X Apply the parking brake. X Manual transmission: engage neutral. AUTOTRONIC*: move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever to P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Open the bonnet (Y page 171). X X * optional Electrical consumers can be switched on again. Do not, however, switch on the lights as this places too heavy a load on the battery. X Remove the jump lead from earth point 4 and negative terminal 3 first, then from positive terminals 1 and 2, each time disconnecting from the battery on your own vehicle first. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X 1 Positive terminal of donor battery 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle 3 Negative terminal of donor battery 4 Negative terminal on your vehicle Open the battery cover (Y page 264). Connect positive terminal 2 on your vehicle to positive terminal 1 of the donor battery using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal 3 of the donor battery to negative terminal 4 of your vehicle's battery using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the donor battery first. X Start the engine. X X Z 267 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 268 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting Points to remember G Risk of accident If you have the vehicle towed, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthere is a brake system malfunction. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage sup- ply or the vehicle's electrical system. The electric power steering and the brake force booster do not work when the engine is not running. Greater braking force will then be required and brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with full force. Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. If this is the case, the steering is locked and the vehicle cannot be steered. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. 268 When towing, observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. ! When towing, pull away slowly and with- out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. ! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar to the towing eyes. You may otherwise damage the vehicle. RVehicles with AUTOTRONIC* must not be tow-started. RIf the engine does not start, try jump-starting it (Y page 266). RThe selector lever must be in position N when towing a vehicle with AUTOTRONIC*. RIf you are towing the vehicle over a considerable distance, this must only be done with the front axle raised. RThe ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Otherwise: - you cannot switch on the ignition - you cannot move the selector lever to N (on vehicles with AUTOTRONIC*) - you have no support when braking i Switch off the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 111). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle, have it towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 269 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Fitting the towing eye Opening the rear cover Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend to use the vehicle for towing, fit the ball coupling (Y page 186) and connect the towbar to this. Towing the vehicle ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. Opening the front cover The mountings for the removable towing eyes are in the bumpers. They are located at the front and rear behind covers on the right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. ! The engine must be switched off (key in ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised or if the parking brake is being tested on a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. 1 Cover Press cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover 1 off the opening. X Securing the towing eye Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 200). X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and tighten it. X 1 Cover Press cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover 1 off the opening. X Vehicles with manual transmission Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral. X Z 269 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 270 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. X X Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) Please note: RVehicles with AUTOTRONIC* must not be tow-started. RThe battery must be connected. RThe engine and catalytic converter must be cold. RAvoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Tow the vehicle or let it roll. Shift to a suitable gear and bring the clutch pedal up slowly. Do not depress the accelerator pedal. The engine is started. Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes or trailer coupling* can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Removing the towing eye Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 200). X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise. X Unscrew the towing eye. X Replace the cover and press it until it engages. X Return the towing eye and the wheel wrench to the vehicle tool kit. X Vehicles with manual transmission X Shift to neutral. Vehicles with AUTOTRONIC* Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. X Vehicles with manual transmission Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 62) in the ignition lock. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral. X 270 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 271 Version: 2.10.6 Practical advice Fuses have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Fuses Notes on changing fuses The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. G Risk of fire Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The fuses are located in the main fuse box in the front-passenger footwell. Main fuse box The main fuse box is in the front-passenger footwell in front of the seat. Fuse allocation chart The fuse allocation chart is in the main fuse box in the front-passenger footwell. Before changing a fuse Park the vehicle. Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X X 1 Cover 2 Retaining screw Remove the footmats*. Turn retaining screw 2 anti-clockwise, e.g. with a coin. X Lift up cover 1. X Remove the cover mat from the battery. X X If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Only use fuses that have been approved Z for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which * optional 271 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, Practical advice Fuses 1 Fuse allocation chart 2 Main fuse box 272 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 272 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 273 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Introduction to technical data ......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Engine ................................................ Performance ...................................... Tyres and wheels .............................. Vehicle dimensions .......................... Vehicle weights ................................. 274 274 275 276 278 280 282 286 286 Trailer coupling* ............................... 290 Service products and capacities ..... 292 273 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 274 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction to technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rother road users could be endangered Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine 274 Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories are available from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres. There, you can also receive advice about technical modifications and have the parts professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when ordering genuine parts. For example, you will find these numbers on your vehicle's identification plates (Y page 276). Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 275 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle electronics Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G Risk of accident Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle's roadworthiness could otherwise be affected. ! Only have work done on the engine elec- tronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components may wear more quickly and your vehicle's warranty and operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting electrical and electronic equipment Electrical and electronic equipment can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must be type-approved and bear the e mark. The e mark may be obtained from the equipment manufacturer or an authorised testing centre. ! Damage or consequential damage arising from fitting equipment not approved by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. If you wish to install two-way radios in the vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of two-way radios if such equipment is installed professionally and a low-reflection exterior aerial is used. The transmission output of the two-way radio must not exceed the maximum transmission outputs listed. G Risk of accident Two-way radios may interfere with the vehicle electronics and thereby jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle and your own safety if: Rthey do not have an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may also cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. For this reason, only have the exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures optimal reception quality for mobile tele- 275 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 276 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle identification plates phones/wireless devices in the vehicle. This also ensures that interference between these devices and the vehicle's electronics is kept to a minimum. If installed, the exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobile phone to the exterior of the vehicle. Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number The vehicle identification plate is located at the bottom of the door frame on the frontpassenger side. Frequency range Maximum transmission output (watts) Short wave (< 50 MHz) 100 Vehicle identification plate (example) 1 Vehicle identification plate 4 m waveband 20 2 Vehicle manufacturer 3 EU type approval number 2 m waveband 50 70 cm waveband 35 25 cm waveband 10 ! If electrical or electronic equipment which does not comply with the above installation conditions is operated inside the vehicle, the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC - Automotive EMC directive) 276 4 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 1 Vehicle identification plate X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate 1. 6 Maximum permissible towing weight 7 Maximum permissible front axle load 8 Maximum permissible rear axle load 9 Paint code number Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 277 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to the information on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located in the engine compartment below the windscreen frame. X Open the bonnet (Y page 171). You will see vehicle identification number (VIN) 1. Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block (crankcase). More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Z 277 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 278 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Engine Engine A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 A 200 TURBO 70 kW (95 bhp) 85 kW (116 bhp) 100 kW (136 bhp) 142 kW (193 bhp) 5,200 rpm 5,500 rpm 5,500 rpm 5,000 rpm 140 Nm 155 Nm 185 Nm 280 Nm 3,500 – 4,000 rpm 3,500 – 4,000 rpm 3,500 – 4,000 rpm 1,800 – 4,850 rpm 4 4 4 4 Displacement 1,498 cm3 1,699 cm3 2,034 cm3 2,034 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,300 rpm 6,300 rpm 6,300 rpm 6,000 rpm Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI 60 kW (82 bhp) 80 kW (109 bhp) 103 kW (140 bhp) 4,200 rpm 4,200 rpm 4,200 rpm Rated torque 180 Nm (200 Nm)34 250 Nm 300 Nm (280 Nm)34 At engine speed 1,400 – 2,600 rpm 1,600 – 2,600 rpm 1,600 – 3,000 rpm 4 4 4 Rated output At engine speed Number of cylinders 34 Vehicles 278 with AUTOTRONIC* * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 279 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Engine A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Displacement 1,991 cm3 1,991 cm3 1,991 cm3 Maximum engine speed 4,800 rpm 4,800 rpm 4,800 rpm Z 279 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 280 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Performance Performance Speeds Manual transmission Maximum speed A 150 A 170 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY 175 km/h 188 km/h A 200 A 200 TURBO 200 km/h 228 km/h Manual transmission A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Maximum speed 170 km/h 186 km/h 201 km/h AUTOTRONIC* Maximum speed A 150 A 170 A 200 A 200 TURBO 170 km/h 183 km/h 195 km/h 220 km/h AUTOTRONIC* A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Maximum speed 165 km/h 181 km/h 196 km/h 280 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 281 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Performance Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 Manual transmission 12.6 seconds 12.6 seconds 10.9 seconds 10.9 seconds 9.8 seconds AUTOTRONIC* 13.5 seconds – 11.5 seconds – 9.9 seconds A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Manual transmission 7.5 seconds 15 seconds 10.8 seconds 9.5 seconds AUTOTRONIC* 7.3 seconds 15.3 seconds 11.1 seconds 9.6 seconds Z * optional 281 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 282 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended* (with run-flat characteristics) If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage which may occur. Information about tyres 35 Only 282 can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat sys- tem are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*35. Therefore, it is recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac- teristics such as handling, noise levels and fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimensional variations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. You will find further information about tyre pressures in the "Operation" section (Y page 178). for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 283 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres 15" Both axles 16" Both axles 17" Both axles A 150 / A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY / A 170 / A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY / A 160 CDI / A 160 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY / A 180 CDI A 200 / A 200 CDI A 200 TURBO Summer tyres 185/65 R15 88T – – Winter tyres 185/65 R15 88T M+S. Wheels 6J x 15 H2 ET 44 – – Summer tyres 195/55 R16 87T 195/55 R16 87H 195/55 R16 87V Winter tyres 195/55 R16 87T M+S. 195/55 R16 87T M+S. 195/55 R16 87T M+S. Wheels 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 215/45 R17 87V 215/45 R17 87V 215/45 R17 87V 7J x 17 H2 ET 54 7J x 17 H2 ET 54 7J x 17 H2 ET 54 Summer Wheels tyres36, 37 Z 36 Snow 37 Only chains only permitted as a starting-off aid. with sports suspension. 283 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 284 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Tyres and wheels AMG equipment* All models 18" Both axles Summer tyres38, 39 215/40 R 18 89W XL Light-alloy wheels 7J x 18 H2 ET 54 MOExtended tyres* i Tyres with run-flat characteristics, only in conjunction with light-alloy wheels and tyre pressure loss warning system. All models40 16" 17" Both axles Both axles Winter tyres41, 42 195/55 R16 87H M+S MOExtended Light-alloy wheels43 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 Summer tyres41, 44 215/45 R17 87V MOExtended Light-alloy wheels43 7J x 17 H2 ET 54 38 Use of snow chains not permitted. with sports suspension. 40 Only with sports suspension. 41 Tyres with run-flat characteristics, only available in conjunction with tyre pressure loss warning system and tyre pressure monitor*. 42 Not available from the factory. You can obtain further information from a specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 43 Not on steel wheels. 44 Snow chains only permitted as a pull-away aid. 39 Only 284 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 285 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Tyres and wheels Spare wheel* Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel*, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. 15" 16" 16" A 150 / A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY / A 170 / A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY / A 160 CDI / A 160 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY / A 180 CDI A 200 / A 200 CDI A 200 TURBO Remove the spare wheel* Summer tyres 185/65 R15 88T – – Steel spare wheel 6J x 15 H2 ET 44 – – Remove the spare wheel* Summer tyres – 195/55 R16 87H 195/55 R16 87V Steel spare wheel – 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 6J x 16 H2 ET 46 T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/90 R16 98M 4.2 bar 4.2 bar 4.2 bar 3.5B x 16 H2 ET 32 3.5B x 16 H2 ET 32 3.5B x 16 H2 ET 32 "Minispare " emergency Tyres spare wheel*45 Tyre pressure Wheels Z 45 Use of snow chains not possible. * optional 285 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 286 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle weights Vehicle dimensions A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 Vehicle length (ECE) 3,883 mm 3,883 mm 3,883 mm 3,883 mm 3,883 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2,040 mm 2,040 mm 2,040 mm 2,040 mm 2,040 mm Vehicle height 1,593 mm 1,593 mm 1,593 mm 1,593 mm 1,595 mm Wheelbase 2,568 mm 2,568 mm 2,568 mm 2,568 mm 2,568 mm A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Vehicle length (ECE) 3,883 mm 3,883 mm 3,883 mm 3,883 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2,040 mm 2,040 mm 2,040 mm 2,040 mm Vehicle height 1,595 mm 1,593 mm 1,593 mm 1,595 mm Wheelbase 2,568 mm 2,568 mm 2,568 mm 2,568 mm Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. You will find more specific weight information on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 276). 286 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 287 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle weights A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 Unladen weight 5-door vehi(in accordance cle with EC directive) 3-door vehicle 1,225 kg 1,245 kg 1,240 kg 1,260 kg 1,270 kg 1,195 kg 1,215 kg 1,210 kg 1,230 kg 1,240 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 5-door vehicle 1,740 kg 1,740 kg 1,770 kg 1,770 kg 1,765 kg 3-door vehicle 1,740 kg 1,740 kg 1,770 kg 1,770 kg 1,765 kg Maximum permissible front axle load 5-door vehicle 860 kg 860 kg 885 kg 885 kg 890 kg 3-door vehicle 860 kg 860 kg 885 kg 885 kg 890 kg Maximum per5-door vehimissible rear axle cle load 3-door vehicle 880 kg 880 kg 885 kg 885 kg 875 kg 880 kg 880 kg 885 kg 885 kg 875 kg Towing a trailer 5-door vehicle 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg 3-door vehicle 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg 920 kg Z 287 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 288 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle weights A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 Maximum roof load 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Unladen weight 5-door vehi(in accordance cle with EC directive) 3-door vehicle 1,305 kg 1,325 kg 1,345 kg 1365 kg 1,275 kg 1,300 kg 1,320 kg 1,340 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 5-door vehicle 1,835 kg 1,835 kg 1,830 kg 1,880 kg 3-door vehicle 1,835 kg 1,835 kg 1,830 kg 1,880 kg Maximum permissible front axle load 5-door vehicle 945 kg 935 kg 935 kg 980 kg 3-door vehicle 945 kg 935 kg 935 kg 980 kg 288 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 289 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Vehicle weights A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Maximum permissible rear axle load 5-door vehicle 890 kg 900 kg 895 kg 900 kg 3-door vehicle 890 kg 900 kg 895 kg 900 kg Towing a trailer 5-door vehicle 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg 3-door vehicle 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg 935 kg Maximum roof load 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg Maximum luggage compartment load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Z 289 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 290 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Trailer coupling* Trailer coupling* Mounting dimensions If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. For trailer couplings fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension is 749 mm. G Risk of accident Only have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. Anchorage points for the trailer coupling 1 Anchorage points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line 290 * optional Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 291 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Trailer coupling* Trailer loads A 150 A 150 BlueEfficiency A 170 A 170 BlueEfficiency A 200 A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Permissible trailer load, braked46 1,000 kg 1,300 kg 1,500 kg 1,000 kg 1,500 kg Permissible trailer load, unbraked 595 kg 595 kg 595 kg 645 kg 645 kg Maximum drawbar noseweight47 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 75 kg 46 At Z a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12 % from a standstill. drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 47 The * optional 291 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 292 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities Service products and capacities Notes on service products and capacities Service products are: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use those products which have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle and are listed in the MercedesBenz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter since: Rparts and service products are matched Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved service products is not covered by the warranty You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB 292 Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Approval have not necessarily been approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuels G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Before refuelling, always turn off the engine. G Risk of injury Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging to your health. Tank capacity Total capacity 54 l Of which reserve fuel Approximately 6 l ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the injection system. Damage resulting from Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 293 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. More information about refuelling and fuels can be found on (Y page 168). Introduction to fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low temperatures Rin urban traffic Ron short trips Rwhen Rin towing a trailer mountainous terrain The consumption figures have been determined according to EU Directive RL 80 / 1268 / EEC. i Only for certain countries: the respective current consumption and emission values of your vehicle can be found in the COC papers (EC-CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered. ! Do not use any special additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. Damage resulting from the use of such additives is not covered by the MercedesBenz warranty. H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- ronmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Z 293 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 294 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities Fuel consumption The consumption figures have been determined according to applicable EU Directives and do not refer to one specific vehicle. Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Manual transmission A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY Urban 7.9 – 8.4 l/100 km 7.4 – 7.8 l/100 km 8.6 – 8.7 l/100 km 8.0 – 8.4 l/100 km Extra-urban 5.4 – 5.7 l/100 km 5.1 – 5.5 l/100 km 5.5 – 5.8 l/100 km 5.1 – 5.5 l/100 km Overall (NEDC) 6.2 – 6.7 l/100 km 5.8 – 6.2 l/100 km 6.6 – 6.8 l/100 km 6.1 – 6.5 l/100 km CO2emissions 148 – 159 g/km 139 – 149 g/km 157 – 163 g/km 146 – 154 g/km Manual transmission A 200 A 200 TURBO Urban 9.6 - 9.6 l/100 km 10.5 – 10.7 l/100 km Extra-urban 5.9 – 6.1 l/100 km 6.4 – 6.6 l/100 km Overall (NEDC) 7.2 – 7.4 l/100 km 7.9 – 8.1 l/100 km CO2emissions 172 – 176 g/km 187 – 192 g/km A 150 A 170 A 200 A 200 TURBO Urban 8.5 – 8.7 l/100 km 8.6 – 9.0 l/100 km 9.6 - 9.6 l/100 km 10.2 – 10.3 l/100 km Extra-urban 5.5 – 6.0 l/100 km 5.5 – 6.0 l/100 km 5.9 – 6.1 l/100 km 6.5 – 6.6 l/100 km AUTOTRONIC* 294 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 295 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities AUTOTRONIC* A 150 A 170 A 200 A 200 TURBO Overall (NEDC) 6.6 – 7.0 l/100 km 6.6 – 7.1 l/100 km 7.2 – 7.4 l/100 km 7.9 – 8.1 l/100 km CO2emissions 157 – 166 g/km 157 – 169 g/km 172 – 176 g/km 187 – 192 g/km Manual transmission A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Urban 6.2 – 6.5 l/100 km 6.4 – 6.5 l/100 km 6.8 – 6.9 l/100 km Extra-urban 4.3 – 4.5 l/100 km 4.2 – 4.4 l/100 km 4.5 – 4.6 l/100 km Overall (NEDC) 4.9 – 5.2 l/100 km 5.0 – 5.2 l/100 km 5.3 – 5.4 l/100 km CO2emissions 128 – 137 g/km 134 – 138 g/km 138 – 140 g/km AUTOTRONIC* A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Urban 7.0 – 7.6 l/100 km 7.0 – 7.6 l/100 km 7.1 – 7.9 l/100 km Extra-urban 4.4 – 4.9 l/100 km 4.4 – 4.9 l/100 km 4.9 – 5.0 l/100 km Overall (NEDC) 5.4 – 5.8 l/100 km 5.4 – 5.8 l/100 km 5.7 – 6.0 l/100 km CO2emissions 142 – 154 g/km 142 – 154 g/km 149 – 159 g/km Z * optional 295 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 296 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities Engine oil A list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Engine oils which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz have the MB Sheet number indicated on the oil container. The table shows which MB Sheet Number applies to which engine: A 150 A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 200 A 200 TURBO 229.3/229.31 229.5/229.51 229.3/229.31 229.5/229.51 229.3/229.31 229.5/229.51 229.3/229.31 229.5/229.51 MB Sheet Number With a diesel particulate filter MB Sheet Number Without a diesel particle filter48 MB Sheet Number i In the event that the: Rengine Rgrade RSAE 48 Only 296 oil brand (MB Sheet number) classification (viscosity) for certain countries. A 160 CDI A 160 CDI BlueFFICIENCY A 180 CDI A 200 CDI 228.51/229.31/229.51 228.51/229.31/229.51 228.51/229.31/229.51 A 160 CDI A 180 CDI A 200 CDI 228.3/228.5/228.51 229.3/229.31/229.5/229.51 228.3/228.5/228.51 229.3/229.31/229.5/229.51 228.3/228.5/228.51 229.3/229.31/229.5/229.51 is not available, you can use another mineral or synthetic engine oil which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Mixing oils reduces the benefits of highgrade engine oil. ! Do not use lubricant additives as they can lead to increased wear and damage to mechanical assemblies. The use of lubricant additives will result in a restriction of your warranty. Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 297 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities ! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel in vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the engine oil listed is not available. You must particle filter may also be used temporarily then have an oil change carried out as soon as possible. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Engine with oil filter A 150 A 150 BlueFFICIENCY A 170 A 170 BlueFFICIENCY A 200 A 200 TURBO Replacement amount 5.0 l 5.0 l 5.0 l 5.0 l Engine with oil filter A 160 CDI A 160 CDI BlueFFICIENCY A 180 CDI A 200 CDI Replacement amount 5.8 l 5.4 l 5.4 l ! Only top up with coolant that has been Coolant The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze Rraising protection the boiling point i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is topped up with a coolant that will ensure adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. More information on coolant and refilling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, sheet no. 310.1 and is available from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 °C. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should: 297 Z Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, Technical data Service products and capacities Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling system against freezing down to around – 37 °C. Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze protection down to –45 °C); otherwise, heat will not be effectively dissipated. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. ! The cooling system contains a filling which must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250, 000 km at the latest. The warranty is only valid if you top up with an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz, and observe the recommended mixing ratios. 298 preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 298 Version: 2.10.6 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 299 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities Capacities The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities. Coolant A 150 Manual transmission A 150 BlueEFFICIENCY A 150 AUTOTRONIC* A 170 Manual transmission A 170 BlueEFFICIENCY A 170 AUTOTRONIC* 6.3 l 6.3 l 6.5 l 6.3 l 6.3 l 6.6 l Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection Down to –37 °C (approx. 50%) 3.2 l 3.2 l 3.25 l 3.2 l 3.2 l 3.3 l Down to –45 °C (approx. 55%) 3.5 l 3.5 l 3.6 l 3.5 l 3.5 l 3.65 l Coolant A 200 A 200 TURBO A 160 CDI Manual transmission A 160 CDI AUTOTRONIC* A 180 CDI A 200 CDI 6.6 l 8.5 l 8.4 l 8.0 l 9.7 l Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection Down to –37 °C (approx. 50%) 3.3 l 4.25 l 4.2 l 4.0 l 4.85 l Down to –45 °C (approx. 55%) 3.65 l 4.7 l 4.6 l 4.4 l 5.35 l Z * optional 299 Dateiname: 6515_0315_02_buchblock.pdf; 169_AKB; 2; 4, en-GB wdomann, preflight 2008-07-16T08:52:06+02:00 - Seite 300 Version: 2.10.6 Technical data Service products and capacities Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. G Risk of accident If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. Have the brake fluid renewed every two years with a brake fluid that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in the Service Booklet. Windscreen washer system G Risk of fire Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled. The washer fluid reservoir holds approximately 4.5 litres. The headlamp cleaning system* and the windscreen washer system are both supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. Further information on windshield washer fluid and the mixing ratio can be found on (Y page 175). i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. 300 * optional